Skip to main content

Full text of "Practical lithography"

See other formats


REESE  LIBRARY 

-> 

OF  THE 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA, 
Class 


MAR  15  190? 


PRACTICAL     LITHOGRAPHY 


S/TY 


PRACTICAL    LITHOGRAPHY. 


ALOIS  SENEFELDER. 
The  Iiiveutor  of  Lithography.     Born  1781— Died  1834. 


Frontispiece.] 


PRACTICAL 
LITHOGRAPHY 


BY 

ALFRED    SEYMOUR 

M 

AUTHOR  OF  "MODKRN  PRINTING  INKS  AND  COLOUR  PRINTING"  "RULE  OF  THUMB  IN  THE. 
WORKSHOP"  "SOME  WORK-A-DAY  NOTIONS"  ETC.  ETC. 


WITH     FRONTISPIECE    AND    THIRTY-THREE     ILLUSTRATIONS 


LONDON 

SCOTT,     GKEENWOOD     &     CO. 
19    LUDGATE    HILL,    E.G. 


NEW    YORK 

D.    VAN    NOSTKAND    COMPANY 

23    MURRAY    STREET 

1903 

[All  Rights  remain  with  Scott,  Greenwood  <t-  Co.] 


REESE 


INTRODUCTION 


"  ALOIS  SENEFELDER  never  benefited  much  by  his  discovery 
of  the  elementary  principles  of  lithography,  but  none  of  those 
to  whom  it  has  given  profitable  occupation  will  remember 
without  some  feeling  the  patient  and  persistent  efforts  of  the 
struggling  actor  and  dramatist  who,  only  after  the  greatest 
sacrifices  and  hardships,  laid  the  germ  of  this  splendid  de- 
velopment, and  watched  and  guarded  its  growth."  There  is 
one  characteristic  feature  of  the  discovery  of  lithography  for 
which  Senefelder  ought  to  receive  the  fullest  credit.  Unlike 
other  discoveries  of  industrial  and  scientific  value,  there  can 
be  no  doubt  whatever  as  to  its  origin.  Senefelder's  claim  has 
never  been  disputed,  yet  "  the  payment  of  a  debt  of  gratitude 
to  the  fact  is  easily  overlooked  when  the  wheel  of  history 
has  made  another  turn." 

It  has  been  again  and  again  suggested  that  the  blighting 
influences  of  Commercialism  have  robbed  lithography  of  many 
of  its  traditional  features  and  a  few,  at  least,  of  its  best  and 
most  artistic  qualities  as  a  reproductive  art.  This  same 
commercial  spirit,  however,  has  inspired  and  encouraged  a 
charming  variety  of  effect  both  in  colour  and  design,  and 
lithography  of  to-day,  in  almost  every  form  of  its  manifesta- 
tion, is  infinitely  more  attractive  and  capable  of  considerably 
more  expressive  power  than  could  ever  have  been  hoped  for 
before  commercial  utility  and  value  demanded  a  full  recog- 
nition. Pleasing  and  harmonious  effects,  which  are  almost 


^21 


vi  INTRODUCTION 

invariably  sought  after  in  lithography,  need  not  be  inartistic, 
and  it  is  quite  possible  for  the  technique  of  the  lithographic 
draughtsman  to  translate  original  work  without  a  serious  de- 
preciation of  its  pictorial  and  artistic  value. 

While  expressing  a  sincere  hope  that  this  volume  may 
be  of  considerable  assistance  to  his  fellow-craftsmen,  the 
writer  wishes  to  emphasise  the  fact  that  resourcefulness  and 
intelligent  application  are  faculties  which  may  be  encouraged 
and  amplified  but  cannot  be  imparted  even  by  volumes  of 
text. 

A  mere  formal  acknowledgment  of  assistance  cordially 
rendered  by  the  editors  of  the  British  Printer  and  The  Caxton 
Magazine  and  Press,  Messrs.  Penrose  &  Co.,  and  other  firms 
whose  blocks  are  primd  facie  evidences  of  their  interest,  does 
not  adequately  express  the  appreciation  with  which  it  has 
been  accepted  and  made  use  of. 

A.   S. 


LONDON,  December  1903. 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 

INTRODUCTION         .  .  .  .  .  .        '    .  .        T 

LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS      .  .  .  ....  xi 

CHAPTER  I 
ELEMENTARY  DETAILS 

Concerning  Stones — Character  and  Texture — Some  Simple  Elements — 
Preparation  of  Stones — Planing  and  Levelling — Grinding  Grained 
Stones — Descriptive  Treatment — American  Method  .  .  .  1-7 

CHAPTER  II 

LITHOGRAPHIC  TRANSFER  INKS 

Various  Forms — Distinguishing  Features — Formulae — "Writing  Transfer 
Ink  —  Stone-to-stone  Transfer  Ink  —  Copperplate  Transfer  Ink — 
A  Modification .  •-.,;  .  '  .  .  .  .  8-11 

CHAPTER  III 
LITHOGRAPHIC  TRANSFER  PAPERS 

Essential  Features  —  Varnish  Transfer  Paper  —  Damp-stone  Transfer 
Paper — French  Transparent  Transfer  Paper — Copperplate  Transfer 
Paper— An  Alternative  Recipe— Granulated  Papers— Photo-litho 
Transfer  Paper .  .  .  .  .  .  .  12-16 

CHAPTER  IV 

COPPERPLATE  TRANSFER  PRINTING 

The  Copperplate  Press— The  Operation — Charging  the  Engraved  Plate— 

Cleaning-otf  and  Polishing — Making  the  Impression — Useful  Notions  17-19 

CHAPTER  V 
THE  LITHOGRAPHIC  PRESS 

Mechanical    Principles  —  Constructive    Details — Scraper  —  Tympan — 

Practical   Suggestions — Elastic   Bedding         .  .  .  20-23 

vii 


viii  CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  VI 
LITHOGRAPHIC  PRESS  WORK 

PAGE 

Preparing  the  Design— Treatment  of  an  Ink  Drawing — Chalk  Drawings 
— Alterations— Value  of  Impressions— Offsets— The  Lithographic 
Hand-roller — Proving — Registration — General  Features — Transfer- 
ring— A  Commercial  Necessity — Arrangement — Choice  of  Paper — 
Transference  to  Stone— Preparing  the  Forme  .  .  .  24-33 

CHAPTER  VII 
MACHINE  PRINTING 

The  Printing  Machine  —  The  Halligan  —  Some  Mechanical  Phases — 
Speed — Pressure— Levelling  the  Stones — Cylinder  Brake — Inking 
Rollers — Damping  ......  34-40 

CHAPTER  VIII 

MACHINE  PRINTING— continued 

Register — Atmospheric  Conditions — The  Key — The  Gripper — Starting 
the  Machine — Fixing  the  Stone — Strength  of  Colour — Grit — Making 
Ready —Regulation  of  Speed  .....  41-46 

CHAPTER  IX 
LITHOGRAPHIC  COLOUR  PRINTING 

A  Commercial  Value— Peculiar  Features— Colour  Sequence — Controlling 

Elements— A  Question  of  Register — Suitable  Paper     .  .  47-51 

CHAPTER  X 
LITHOGRAPHIC  COLOUR  PRINTING— continued 

Printing  Inks — Varnish — Reducing  Medium — Relative  Values — Some 
Useful  Hints  —  Bronze  Blue  —  Vermilion— Ink  Mixing  —  Ceramic 
Transfers — Colour  Transparencies  ....  52-56 

CHAPTER  XI 
SUBSTITUTES  FOR  LITHOGRAPHIC  STONES 

Metal  Plates— Preparation— Manipulation — Descriptive  Details — Machine 

Printing— The  Printing  Bed— Rotary  Printing  Machine       '  .  57-66 


CONTENTS  ix 

CHAPTER  XII 
TIN-PLATE  'PRINTING 

PAGE 

Its  Evolution— Transfer  and  Direct  Transfer  Printing — The  Coated  Paper 
— Reversed  Designs — Sequence  of  Printing — Printing  Inks — Purity 
of  Tone — Drying  .  .  *  .  .  .  '.  67-71 

CHAPTER  XIII 
TIN-PLATE  PRINTING — continued 

Direct  Tin  Printing  —  The  Machine  —  Peculiarities  of  Impression- 
Cylinder  Covering— Colour  Sequence— Printing  Inks— Drying  Racks 
— Air-drying  versus  Stoving  .  .  .  --  .  72-79 

CHAPTER  XIV 
TIN-PLATE  DECORATION 

Suitable  Designs— A  Variety  of  Effects— Gold  Lacquer— Super-position  of 

Colours — Embossed  Effects— Embossing  Plates— Lacquers       .  80-83 

CHAPTER  XV 
PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHY 

Early  Experiments— An  Analysis— The  Direct  Process — Transfer  Process 
— Line  and  Half-tone— Some  Difficulties — A  Natural  Grain— Ink 
Photo-screen  Effects — Essential  Features  .  .  .  84-88 

CHAPTER  XVI 

PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHY — continued 

The   Copy— Gradations  of  Tone — "Scraper  Boards" — Description    and 

Effect— Shading  Mediums— Crayon  Drawings — Half-tone  Copy  89-95 

CHAPTER  XVII 
PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHY— continued 

A   Copying  Table  —  Exposure  —  Illumination  —  Photo-litho  Transfers  — 

The  Paper— Printing— Developing— A  Direct  Process  .  96-101 

'INDEX  102-104 


' 


ILLUSTRATIONS 


I'AGK 

ALOIS  SENEFELDEK  ......    Frontispiece 

STONE-PLANING  MACHINE  .  .  .  .  .  .  .4 

STONE-POLISHING  MACHINE  ......        5 

COPPERPLATE  PRESS  .  .  .  .  .  .  .17 

HOT  PLATE  ........       18 

LITHOGRAPHIC  PRESS         .  .  .  .  -   .  .21 

DETAILS  OF  LITHOGRAPHIC  PRESS  .  .  .  .  .22 

LITHOGRAPHIC  HAND  PRESS          .  .  .  .  .  .      23 

LITHOGRAPHIC  HAND  ROLLER       .  .  .  .  .  .28 

REGISTER  LINES     ........      30 

ARRANGEMENT  OF  TRANSFERS       .  .  .  .  .  .32 

TRANSFERRING  BOARD       .  .    . .         '  ..  .  .  .32 

LITHOGRAPHIC  PRINTING  MACHINE  .  .  .  .  .35 

HALLIGAN  MACHINE  .  .  ,  .  .  .36 

PRESSURE  MECHANISM       .  .  .  .  .  .38 

INKING  ROLLERS     ........      39 

DAMPING  ROLLERS.  .......       -10 

GRIPPER      .........       42 

TRIMMED  EDGES     ........       43 

COUNTER  SHAFTING  .......       44 

MOTOR  DRIVING      ........       45 

PLATE-GRAINING  MACHINE  .  .  .  .  .  59,  60 

PLATE  BED  ...  .  .  .  .  .  .62 

ALUMINIUM  ROTARY  MACHINE      .  .  .  .  .  .63 

ALUMINIUM  ROTARY  SECTION       .  .  .  .  .  .66 

TIN-PLATE  PRINTING  MACHINE     ......       73 

TIN-PLATE  RACKS  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  78,  79 

METHOD  OF  STACKING  PLATES     .  .  .  .  .  .79 

SCRAPER  BOARD  WORK     .......      91 

SCRAPER  BOARD  TEXTURES  .  .  .  .  .  .93 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  COPYING  BOARD   .  97 


PRACTICAL    LITHOGRAPHY 


CHAPTER   I 

ELEMENTARY  DETAILS 

Concerning  Stones — Character  and  Texture — Some  Simple  Elements — 
Preparation  of  Stones— Planing  and  Levelling — Grinding  Grained 
Stones — Descriptive  Treatment — American  Method. 

THERE  are  a  vast  number  of  details  in  connection  with 
lithography  and  lithographic  printing  which  are  indisputably 
elementary  in  their  character.  It-  would  be  impossible, 
however,  to  regard  them  as  non  -  essential,  and  a  just 
appreciation  of  their  value  and  influence  must  of  necessity 
enter  into  any  comprehensive  exposition  of  the  craft. 

Stone  as  a  printing  medium. — The  value  of  the  Bavarian 
limestone  was  one  of  those  fortunate  discoveries  which 
tended  to  materialise  lithography  as  a  graphic  art,  and 
may  even  be  regarded  as  a  fundamental  principle,  the 
practical  value  of  which  is  only  equalled  by  its  far-reaching 
effects. 

Other  printing  surfaces  have  been  discovered  and 
developed,  with  more  or  less  substantial  results,  yet  with- 
out depreciating  their  merits,  it  will  be  but  a  fair  recogni- 
tion to  concede  the  premier  position  to  the  Solenhofen 
and  other  limestones  of  a  like  nature. 


2  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

The  homogeneity  and  porosity  of  these  stones  render 
them  peculiarly  suitable  for  lithographic  purposes,  and  it 
undoubtedly  reflects  a  vast  amount  of  credit  upon  Sene- 
felder  that  even  at  the  outset  he  should  select  a  medium 
so  well  adapted  and  in  every  way  so  eminently  suitable 
for  graphic  reproduction. 

I  have  already,  and  almost  inadvertently,  indicated  the 
peculiar  value  of  the  Bavarian  stone,  for  homogeneity  and 
porosity  of  texture  are  absolutely  essential  properties,  and 
upon  these  is  based  almost  every  theory  which  has  assisted 
in  the  development  of  this  craft.  These  properties,  in  con- 
junction with  a  suitable  greasy  pigment,  provide  the  requisite 
materials  for  that  cause  and  effect  which  require  and  compel 
consideration. 

The  simple  elements  of  lithography  may  be  very  briefly 
described,  and  in  this  direction  at  least  we  must  follow 
certain  well-defined  lines  which  may  be  regarded  as  well- 
worn  ruts,  the  consideration  of  which  offers  little  that 
is  new. 

A  brief  review  of  -  the  theories  of  chemical  and  mech- 
anical affinities  is  best  calculated  to  impress  upon  the  mind 
the  elementary  principles  of  the  lithographer's  art. 

The  penetrative  power  of  a  greasy  pigment,  together  with 
the  porous  nature  of  the  litho-stone,  may  be  regarded  as  the 
cause  by  which  the  lithographer  produces  as  an  effect  a 
design  or  impression  which,  to  some  extent,  enters  into  the 
texture  of  the  stone — the  homogeneity  of  which  checks  any 
tendency  to  spread.  This  fatty  matter  may  be  applied  in  one 
or  two  ways,  either  t  as  a  transfer  from  some  other  printing 
surface,  or  as  a  direct  drawing  with  pen,  brush,  or  crayon. 

The  first  question  for  consideration  will  be  the  initial 
preparation  of  the  litho-stones.  These  preparatory  opera- 
tions— which  have  for  their  object  the  levelling,  polishing, 
and  cleaning  of  the  stones — were  at  one  time  entirely  per- 


ELEMENTARY  DETAILS  3 

formed  by  hand  labour,  but  are  now  accomplished  with 
much  greater  facility  and  in  a  more  effective  manner  by 
machinery.  The  importance  of  each  individual  operation 
will  be  more  readily  appreciated  when  once  its  purpose 
is  clearly  understood.  A  litho-stone  having  a  perfectly  level 
surface  is  necessary  in  order  to  enable  the  printer  to  secure 
a  firm  and  uniform  pressure  over  the  whole  design  when 
printing  therefrom.  A  smooth,  polished  surface  will  readily 
receive  the  finest  designs,  and  retain  all  their  original 
characteristics.  A  clean  surface  is  an  absolute  necessity,  i.e. 
a  chemically  clean  surface  free  from  grease  or  any  foreign 
matter  which  would  be  likely  to  enter  into  the  texture  of 
the  stone  and  by  so  doing  injure  any  greasy  drawing  or 
transfer  which  might  be  made  thereon. 

These  are  simple,  elementary  principles,  and  as  such 
are  probably  familiar  to  every  reader,  but  the  frequent 
result  of  familiarity  is  a  dangerous  tendency  to  under- 
estimate the  importance  of  everyday  causes  and  effects. 
If,  therefore,  such  a  reference  as  the  above  to  common 
details  serves  to  convey  some  intelligent  idea  of  their  place 
and  true  value,  then  no  apology  whatever  will  be  necessary 
for  their  insertion  in  this  volume.  It  has  already  been 
stated  that,  in  the  preparation  of  litho-stones,  the  supersed- 
ing of  hand  labour  by  machinery  has  effected  considerable 
and  important  changes. 

Several  machines,  all  of  more  or  less  practical  value, 
have  been  introduced  to  the  trade.  One  of  the  more 
recent  developments,  a  stone -planing  machine,  possesses 
many  features  of  real  merit  (Fig.  1). 

The  stone  is  securely  fixed  on  a  perfectly  true  bed  and 
passes  slowly  to  and  fro  beneath  the  blades  of  powerful 
cutting  knives.  These  blades  are  arranged  in  an  inverted 
V-shape  and  locked  in  an  oscillating  framework.  By  an 
automatic  action  they  are  almost  imperceptibly  lowered  at 


4  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

each  traverse  of  the  machine,  when  they  lightly  cut  away 
the  surface  of  the  stone  until  the  old  work  is  completely 
removed  and  a  smooth  level  face  is  assured.  The  chief 
objection  to  this  type  of  machine  is  that  in  course  of  time 
the  knives  become  worn  and  slightly  irregular,  and  it  is 
but  reasonable  to  suppose  that  when  a  number  of  small 
stones  have  been  operated  upon  and  immediately  afterwards 
a  full-sized  stone  is  planed,  such  irregularities  will  be  very 
pronounced  and  detrimental. 

Many  machines  have  been  designed  on  the  simple  grind- 


FIG.  l. 

ing  principle,  but  one  type  differs  from  its  contemporaries 
and  offers  several  distinct  advantages  over  them  (Fig.   2). 

This  machine  is  constructed  on]' hand -polishing  lines, 
i.e.  the  movements  are  to  some  extent  mechanical  arrange- 
ments of  hand  -  polishing  principles.  The  size  of  stone 
makes  no  difference  whatever,  and  the  results  are  in  the 
main  uniform  and  satisfactory.  The  inconveniently  sharp 
edges,  such  as  are  produced  by  the  planing  machine,  are 
unknown, — the  wear  and  tear  on  the'  stone  is  perceptibly 
lessened,  and  the  power  required  to  drive  such  a  machine 
is  not  by  any  means  a  serious  matter. 

When  a  planing  machine  does  not  enter  into  the  opera- 
tion, and  grinding  by  hand  is  therefore  necessary,  sharp, 


ELEMENTARY   DETAILS  5 

clean  sand  should  be  used  as  a  grinding  medium.  To 
secure  some  degree  of  uniformity  in  the  grain,  and  at  the 
same  time  remove  all  the  larger  particles  of  grit,  pass  the 
sand  first  through  a  fine  sieve.  The  harder  qualities  of 
sand  have,  of  course,  the  greatest  cutting  power,  and 
therefore  are  the  most  suitable  for  this  purpose. 


FIG.  2. 

When  hand-grinding  is  resorted  to,  a  continuous  elliptical 
motion  of  one  stone  over  the  other  with  a  slight  twist  from 
the  wrist  will  prove  most  effective. 

To  finish  the  grinding,  and  as  far  as  possible  remove 
the  deeper  sand  scratches,  work  off  the  sand  in  the  form 
of  a  sludge.  Unless  this  operation  is  carefully  and  patiently 
performed,  scratches  of  considerable  depth  may  appear  on 


6  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

various  parts  of  the  stone's  surface.  These,  in  the  sub- 
sequent polishing,  may  offer  a  strong  temptation  to  the 
operator  to  work  over  one  part  of  the  stone  more  than 
another,  so  as  to  effect  the  removal  of  such  scratches  with 
greater  rapidity.  The  almost  certain  result  of  this  would 
be  an  uneven  surface,  which  would  in  many  ways  prove 
troublesome  to  the  printer. 

The  graining  of  stones. — This  is  a  matter  concerning  the 
preparation  of  stones  which  must  not  be  overlooked.  The 
introduction  of  shading  mediums  and  other  contrivances  of 
a  similar  character  has  considerably  minimised  the  importance 
of  the  grained  stone,  inasmuch  as  it  cannot  now  be  regarded 
as  an  indispensable  feature  of  lithography.  It  is,  however, 
still  of  inestimable  value,  and  will  probably  always  find  a 
place  and  purpose  in  the  practice  of  lithography,  despite 
its  depreciation  owing  to  present-day  limitations. 

Kecognising,  then,  the  possibility  of  its  retention,  at  least 
for  some  time  to  come,  as  a  suitable  printing  surface  upon 
which  the  lithographic  draughtsman  can  work  with  un- 
doubted facility  of  execution  and  effect,  we  must  perforce 
include  a  brief  description  of  its  preparation  in  this  chapter. 
First  of  all,  level  the  stone  and  to  some  extent  polish 
it,  after  which  the  graining  may  be  proceeded  with.  A 
glass  muller  about  6  or  7  inches  in  diameter  makes  an 
excellent  "  grainer."  Failing  this,  a  handy  substitute  will 
be  found  in  the  form  of  a  small  litho-stone,  hard  in  texture, 
and  with  a  smooth,  level  surface.  Use  as  a  graining  medium 
sharp,  clean  silver  sand  only,  passing  it  carefully  through  a 
sieve  according  to  the  size  or  depth  of  the  grain  required. 
Sprinkle  a  little  of  this  sand  uniformly  over  the  stone  under 
treatment,  together  with  a  few  drops  of  clean  water.  With 
a  continuous  circular  movement  pass  the  graining  muller 
from  end  to  end  of  the  stone,  exerting  a  firm  and  uniform 
pressure.  Eepeat  this  operation  again  and  again,  adding 


ELEMENTARY   DETAILS  7 

sand  and  water  as  required.  Considerable  time  coupled 
with  intelligent  application  will  be  necessary  to  carry  out 
this  work  successfully.  Should  the  sand  become  too  much 
worn  before  its  renewal  the  grain  will  in  proportion  lose 
its  "tooth"  or  sharpness.  On  the  other  hand  lies  the 
danger  of  producing  a  grain  which  is  too  harsh  or  pro- 
nounced. Therefore  much  depends  upon  the  skill  and 
judgment  of  the  operator.  A  safe  plan  is  to  ascertain  the 
progress  at  any  time  when  a  satisfactory  result  might  be 
reasonably  expected.  The  best  way  to  accomplish  this  is 
by  washing  from  the  face  of  the  stone  any  accumulation  of 
sand,  and  drying  it,  so  that  a  test  can  be  made  with  the 
actual  grade  of  crayon  to  be  used  in  the  subsequent 
drawing.  A  powerful  current  of  clean,  cold  water  affords 
the  best  means  for  removing  every  trace  of  sand  from 
the  finished  stone,  and  will  leave  it  in  a  condition  of  almost 
complete  readiness  for  the  draughtsman  ;  a  good  drying  is  then 
all  that  is  necessary.  Good  results  have  been  claimed  for  a 
method  of  graining  which  was  introduced  by  the  Americans 
a  few  years  ago.  In  this  process  the  grain  is  produced  by 
sprinkling  the  surface  of  the  stone  with  sand  and  rolling 
it  with  small  glass  balls.  These  balls  having  a  limited 
area  in  which  to  work  exert  a  continuous  cutting  power  with- 
out any  tendency  to  produce  scratches.  Some  mechanical 
arrangement  is  necessary  to  impart  this  continuous  rolling 
movement  to  the  glass  balls  and  to  maintain  a  uniform 
speed.  It  is  quite  easy  to  understand  that  with  such  a 
process,  carried  out  under  favourable  conditions,  very  fine 
results  might  be  produced  with  great  rapidity. 


CHAPTER    II 

LITHOGRAPHIC  TRANSFER  INKS 

Various  Forms — Distinguishing  Features— Formulae — Writing  Transfer 
Ink — Stone-to-stone  Transfer  Ink — Copperplate  Transfer  Ink — 
A  Modification. 

GIVEN  a  perfectly  clean  and  smooth  polished  stone  as 
described  in  the  previous  chapter,  the  next  important  point 
is  the  composition  of  the  fatty  matter  wherewith  a  design 
or  drawing  is  applied. 

As  already  stated,  the  active  principle  in  any  suitable 
transfer  medium  of  this  character  is  invariably  the  same, 
no  matter  what  form  its  composition  takes.  For  applying 
with  pen  or  brush  it  must  possess  soluble  properties,  and  of 
necessity  be  reduced  to  a  liquid  form.  Such  soluble  pro- 
perties, however,  must  not  interfere  with  its  fatty  properties, 
these  latter  being  essential  features. 

In  crayon  or  chalk  drawing  the  composition  must  be 
employed  in  a  concrete  form,  as  a  crayon,  the  hardness  and 
texture  of  which  will  be  controlled  (1)  by  the  character  of 
the  work  to  be  carried  out ;  (2)  by  the  character  of  surface 
to  be  operated  upon. 

Transfers  from  other  printing  surfaces  can  only  be  made 
when  the  composition  used  is  in  the  form  of  a  pigment,  and 
reduced  to  a  convenient  working  consistency. 

These,  then,  comprise  the  varieties  of  transfer  mediums 
which  are  likely  to  be  required  in  most  phases  of  commercial 
lithography.  Others  are,  of  course,  employed  for  specific 


LITHOGRAPHIC  TRANSFER   INKS  9 

purposes  and  under  peculiar  conditions ;  but  these,  again,  are 
more  or  less  modifications  of  existing  formulae,  prepared  to 
meet  particular  requirements. 

The  ink  used  for  transferring  impressions  from  one  print- 
ing surface  to  another,  e.g.,  the  re- transferring  of  work  from 
stone  to  stone,  may  with  a  very  slight  alteration  serve  for 
type  to  stone  transfer ;  but  a  considerable  departure  must 
be  effected  to  produce  a  satisfactory  photo-litho  transfer  ink, 
while  a  composition  of  a  peculiarly  distinctive  character  will 
be  requisite  for  the  successful  production  of  transfers  from 
copperplate  engravings,  as  well  as  for  a  transfer  ink  for 
writing  and  drawing  on  stone  or  transfer  paper.  This 
writing  transfer  ink  must  be  soluble  in  water,  yet  without 
becoming  slimy ;  otherwise  it  will  not  work  freely  with  the 
pen  or  brush.  It  must  also  dry  quickly,  and  without  any 
tendency  to  smear. 

A  plate  transfer  ink  must  neither  rnelt  nor  drag  when 
applied  to  the  hot  plate.  It  must,  of  course,  soften  suffi- 
ciently to  fill  in  the  lines  of  the  engraving,  and.  should  so 
harden  as  it  cools  that  it  cannot  easily  be  dragged  away 
during  the  cleaning  and  polishing  operations.  See  Chap.  IV. 
page  19. 

Each  and  all  of  the  above  inks  must  be  excessively 
greasy  and  penetrative,  but  without  having  the  slightest 
tendency  to  spread  superficially.  The  ingredients  and 
methods  of  preparation  specified  in  the  succeeding  paragraphs 
are  not  given  as  standard  formulae,  but  in  corroboration  of 
statements  made,  and  as  practical  illustrations  of  the  character 
and  purpose  of  transfer  inks  and  compositions  generally. 

Transfer  ink. — Writing  transfer  ink,  for  writing  or 
drawing  on  stone  or  transfer  paper,  may  consist  of  equal 
quantities  of : — 

Castile  soap,  Tallow, 

Wax,  Shellac. 


io  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

with  the  addition  of  carbon  black  or  black  printing  ink  as  a 
colouring  matter.     Another  reliable  formula  is  :— 

Soap          .  .  .  .  .4  parts 

Tallow      .  .  .  .  3     „ 

Wax         .  .  .  .  6     „ 

Shellac     .  .  .  .  4     „ 

Carbon  black  .  .  .  1     „ 

Whichever  formula  is  adopted  the  method  of  preparation 
is  the  same  combination. 

Free  the  soap  from  all  moisture  by  drying,  and  thus 
facilitate  its  combining  with  the  other  ingredients. 

Melt  the  tallow  and  wax  over  a  hot  fire  until  they  are 
thoroughly  well  mixed.  Add  the  dried  soap  a  little  at  a 
time,  so  that  it  may  become  thoroughly  incorporated  with 
the  wax  and  tallow.  Bring  the  mixture  to  boiling-point, 
then  remove  it  from  the  fire  or  stove  and  ignite  the  fumes 
which  will  then  be  rising  freely.  Continue  the  burning 
process  for  about  fifteen  minutes,  then  extinguish  the  flames 
by  replacing  the  lid  of  the  pan.  The  shellac  and  black 
may  be  added  while  the  composition  is  cooling. 

Stone-to-stone  re-transfer  ink. — The  ingredients  of  this 
ink  consist  of  : — 

4  oz.  Transfer  ink.  4  oz.  Medium  varnish. 

4    „  Litho  black  ink.  1   „  Canada  balsam. 

Melt  the  transfer  ink  over  a  slow  fire  and  add  the  other 
ingredients  separately. 

Canada  balsam  will  not  only  add  to  the  effectiveness  of 
this  ink,  but  it  will  also  improve  its  working  qualities. 

Copperplate  transfer  ink. — Ingredients  consist  of  : — 

1  oz.  Tallow.  4  oz.  Bitumen. 

3  ,,  Bee's  wax.  1    „  Canada  balsam. 

4  „   Shellac.  1    „,   Carbon  black. 


The    method    in   this    case    differs    somewhat    from    the 


LITHOGRAPHIC  TRANSFER   INKS  u 

preceding.  First  melt  the  bitumen  and  then  add  the  wax 
and  soap  in  small  pieces  as  before.  Burn  this  for  fifteen 
minutes,  and  add  the  shellac,  balsam,  and  black,  boiling 
the  whole  gently  for  forty  minutes.  Mould  into  squares 
or  sticks,  and  for  convenience  in  handling  cover  these  with 
tinfoil. 

Should  an  extra  powerful  ink  be  required  for  shading 
or  stippling  films,  the  stone-to-stone  re-transfer  ink  can  be 
reduced  to  a  working  consistency  with  castor  oil  instead 
of  varnish,  and  thus  rendered  suitable  for  this  purpose. 


CHAPTER  III 

LITHOGRAPHIC  TRANSFER  PAPERS 

Essential  Features  —  Varnish  Transfer  Paper  —  Damp-stone  Transfer 
Paper — French  Transparent  Transfer  Paper — Copperplate  Transfer 
Paper — An  Alternative  Recipe — Granulated  Papers — Photo-litho 
Transfer  Paper. 

TRANSFER  papers  are  even  more  used  than  the  transfer 
compositions  already  described,  and  in  greater  variety,  in 
consequence  of  which  there  is  a  wide  difference  of  opinion 
concerning  their  merits. 

To  a  certain  extent  the  specific  value  of  any  transfer 
paper  must  depend  upon  local  conditions.  That  which  might 
be  of  the  utmost  value  to  one  printer  would  in  all  probability 
fail  to  meet  the  requirements  of  another.  With  these  also, 
as  with  the  transfer  inks,  the  main  point  is  to  grasp  the 
general  principles  involved.  Adhering  to  these  principles 
enables  any  intelligent  workman  to  adapt  the  transfers  to  his 
own  peculiar  necessity.  It  is  most  important  that  lithographic 
transfer  paper  should  be  absolutely  impervious  to  the  transfer 
composition  or  ink,  so  that  an  impression  of  full  strength  can 
be  conveyed  to  the  stone,  leaving  its  greasy  properties  unim- 
paired. The  paper  therefore  must  undergo  special  prepara- 
tion, and  here  again  the  character  of  the  work  and  the  con- 
ditions under  which  it  is  carried  out  are  the  chief  controlling 
elements.  So  much  is  this  the  case  that  many  lithographic 
printers  prefer  to  make  their  own  transfer  paper,  and  find 
such  a  procedure  eminently  satisfactory. 

12 


LITHOGRAPHIC   TRANSFER   PAPERS  13 

A  good  bank  post  double  foolscap  paper,  about  26 
lb.,  first  thinly  coated  with  a  solution  of  concentrated 
size  and  afterwards  varnished  with  a  heavy  coach  body 
varnish,  gives  excellent  results.  When  transferring  large 
work  in  which  a  number  of  printings  are  involved,  and 
where  accuracy  of  register  is  a  sine  qud  non,  the  following 
mixture  may,  if  desired,  be  substituted  for  the  coach  body 
varnish  : — 

Best  oak  varnish  .  .  .1  quart. 

Turpentine  .  .  .  '.         J  pint. 

Boiled  linseed  oil  .  .  .         J     „ 

Paper  thus  prepared  rarely  stretches  or  becomes  distorted  to 
any  appreciable  extent,  and  can  be  used  writh  equally  good 
results  on  either  cold  or  warm  stones. 

Its  keeping  qualities  are,  however,  limited ;  it  is  therefore 
advisable  to  utilise  the  transfer  impressions  with  as  little 
delay  as  possible. 

This  may  be  criticised  as  a  somewhat  primitive  and 
old-fashioned  transfer  paper ;  but  of  the  many  transfer 
papers  now  in  use,  none  can  claim  to  be  exactly  new. 

Another  stone- to-stone  transfer  paper  of  the  simplest 
possible  character  can  be  made  by  coating  a  good  writing 
paper  with  the  following  composition.  Soak  3  oz.  of  glue 
in  6  oz.  of  water  for  about  8  hours.  Eeduce  1  lb.  of 
starch  to  a  thick,  creamy  paste  by  rubbing  it  down  in  a 
little  cold  water  and  then  adding  boiling  water  until  the 
required  consistency  is  obtained.  Mix  the  starch  and 
glue  together,  and  add  a  little  gamboge  or  cochineal 
as  colouring  matter,  so  as  to  enable  the  printer  to 
see  at  a  glance  which  is  the  coated  side  of  the  paper. 
Spread  this  composition  on  the  paper  while  it  is  still 
warm. 

A  transparent  transfer  paper  with  a  soluble  coating  is 
frequently  desirable,  and  for  certain  purposes  may  be  strongly 


14  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

recommended.  A  French  transfer  paper  meets  such  a  re- 
quirement, and  at  the  same  time  possesses  many  other 
excellent  qualities.  It  picks  up  a  firm,  clean  impression,  and 
transfers  every  particle  of  it  to  the  stone.  It  is  also  trans- 
parent, and  sufficiently  adhesive  to  stick  to  a  very  slightly 
damped  stone  under  a  light  pressure. 

A  transfer  paper  which  may  be  used  as  a  base  upon 
which  to  write  or  draw  a  design  for  subsequent  trans- 
ference to  stone,  as  well  as  for  stone-to-stone  transferring, 
should  be  coated  with  a  composition  of  a  gelatinous 
character,  which  will  not  be  readily  soluble  in  water. 
Writing  transfer  ink  is  of  course  dissolved  in  water,  and 
its  effect  on  a  soft,  soluble  composition  would  be  dis- 
astrous. 

The  following  formula  is  suggestive  as  well  as  prac- 
tical : — 

Gelatine       .  .  .  .  4  oz. 

Isinglass       .  .  .  .  6  „ 

Flake  white  .  .  .  3  Ib. 

Gamboge      .  .  .  .  2  oz. 

Make  a  strong  size  of  the  above  by  boiling  the  gelatine 
and  isinglass  with  a  little  water.  Mix  the  gamboge  and 
flake  white  with  a  little  warm  water,  and  add  the  mixture  to 
the  gelatine  solution.  This  composition  must  be  applied  to 
the  paper  while  still  quite  warm,  as  it  forms  into  a  com- 
paratively stiff  jelly  while  cooling.  This  paper  should  be 
transferred  to  warm  stones. 

Copperplate  transfer  paper  is  to  some  extent  a  develop- 
ment of  the  variety  just  described ;  that  is,  if  the 
conditions  under  which  such  transfers  are  made  will  bear 
comparison  with  operations  of  an  essentially  different 
character. 

The  composition  used  for  coating  copperplate  transfer 
paper  must  possess  a  somewhat  heavy  body,  and  for  this 


LITHOGRAPHIC  TRANSFER   PAPERS  15 

reason  plaster  of  paris  enters  into  its  composition,  which  is 
as  follows : — 

Plaster  of  paris  ...  .  .             ..  *     2  Ib. 

Flake  white  .  .  .                       1   „ 

Flour            .  v .'  .                       "  .  '       2  „ 
Fish  glue      .                                                             ±  „ 

Alum  .         .  .  .  .             .         1  oz. 

Soak  the  alum  and  glue  from  8  to  10  hours,  and  then  boil 
them  until  they  are  dissolved.  Make  the  flour  into  a  smooth 
paste  by  the  addition  of  a  little  water,  and  mix  it  with  the 
flake  white.  Mix  the  plaster  of  paris  with  water,  and  stir 
continuously  until  it  becomes  incapable  of  setting.  Add  the 
other  ingredients,  already  mixed,  and  see  that  they  become 
thoroughly  incorporated  with  the  plaster  of  paris,  after  which 
coat  the  paper  twice  with  the  mixture. 

The  following  may  be  substituted  for  the  above :  — 

Plaster  of  paris         .  ...  .  .         2tlb. 

Flour  .  ....      •••.,"      .    ;.'  ,         2  „ 

Gelatine     v.  .^  .^  ;.  .         4  oz. 

A  transfer  paper  with  its  surface  granulated  to  represent  a 
mechanical  stipple,  or  the  texture  of  a  grained  stone,  may  be 
prepared  in  the  following  manner.  Take  of 

Starch          .  .  .  .  .9  oz. 

Parchment  chippings  .  .  12   „ 

Flake  white  .  .  .  14  „ 

Prepare  the  starch  as  previously  described,  and  dissolve  the 
isinglass  by  boiling.  Mix  the  flake  white  into  a  thin  paste 
by  the  addition  of  water.  Warm  the  three  ingredients,  and 
mix  the  whole  thoroughly.  Coat  a  fairly  heavy  printing 
paper  twice  with  this  composition,  and  when  it  is  thoroughly 
dry  give  it  the  required  granulation  by  means  of  grained 
stones  or  engraved  plates.  The  grain  thus  imparted  breaks 
up  the  drawing  into  a  series  of  minute  dots.  Paper  of  this 
description  is  most  suitable  for  pencil  or  crayon  work.  Its 


16  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

usefulness  is  obvious.  It  enables  the  artist  to  use  his  chalks 
in  the  usual  manner,  without  the  inconvenience  of  handling 
large  stones.  No  graining  of  the  stone  is  necessary,  and  the 
grained  effect  can  be  confined  to  any  portion  of  the  design. 

Photo-litho  transfer  paper  is  in  every  respect  a  specific 
article,  the  coating  of  which  consists  of  a  gelatinous  emulsion, 
which  can  be  readily  sensitised,  and  upon  which  a  photo- 
graphic image  can  be  developed.  Special  preparation  and 
manipulation  are  therefore  necessary  in  connection  with  its 
production,  and  these  points  will  be  fully  dealt  with  in  a 
subsequent  chapter. 

One  more  variety  of  transfer  paper  should  be  mentioned, 
namely,  the  diaphanic,  which  possesses  excellent  qualities  for 
certain  classes  of  work.  It  is  very  transparent,  and  ex- 
tremely useful  in  the  tracing  of  key  formes,  or  for  making 
facsimile  drawings  for  immediate  transference  to  stone. 


CHAPTER    IV 


COPPERPLATE  TRANSFER  PRINTING 

The  Copperplate  Press — The  Operation — Charging  the  Engraved  Plate 
— Cleaning-off  and  Polishing  —  Making  the  Impression — Useful 
Notions. 

ALTHOUGH  copperplate  printing  may  not  now  be  so  extensively 
practised  as  in  years  gone  by,  it  is  not,  so  far  as  we  can 
judge,  very  likely  to  be 
superseded  in  the  near 
future.  It  is  still  regarded 
as  a  necessary  adjunct 
to  lithography,  especially 
where  the  amount  of  com- 
mercial work  produced  is 
of  any  moment. 

From  a  purely  mech- 
anical point  of  view  the 
construction  of  the  cop- 
perplate press  (Fig.  3)  is 
of  an  exceedingly  simple 
character.  Its  primary 
purpose  is  to  produce  a 
heavy  and  uniform  pres- 
sure on  the  plate  during 
operation. 

After  being  charged  with  a  special  pigment  and  cleaned  as 
hereafter  described,  the  plate  is  laid,  face  upwards,  on  the  iron 


i8  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

bed  or  table  of  tbe  press  and  in  contact  with  the  paper,  and 
passed  through  between  two  iron  cylinders.  These  cylinders 
are  so  adjusted  as  to  produce  an  exceptionally  heavy  pres- 
sure. Such  are  the  simple  elements  of  a  process  which, 
however,  requires  much  closer  investigation. 

In  its  application  to  lithography  the  following  are  the 
only  requisites  for  copperplate  transfer  printing. 

A  stick  of  prepared  transfer  ink — whiting,  free  from 
grit — transfer  paper,  and  a  plentiful  supply  of  soft  rags. 
Likewise,  an  iron  plate  with  a  gas  jet  underneath  (Fig.  4), 
a  square  of  printer's  blanket,  and  a  damp  book  consisting 
of  twenty  or  thirty  sheets  of  blotting  or  other  absorbent 

paper     slightly  and    uni- 
formly damped. 

A  good  copperplate 
transfer  paper  can  be 
made  according  to  the 
recipe  given  in  Chap.  III., 
but  unless  a  fairly  large 
quantity  is  used  the  com- 
mercial qualities  will  be 
.found  most  economical. 

Copperplate  printing,  in  its  application  to  lithography, 
is  a  simple  operation,  but  it  requires  extraordinary  care 
for  its  successful  execution.  The  conditions  under  which 
lithographic  transfers  are  made  from  a  copperplate  engrav- 
ing are  vastly  different  from  those  which  control  copper- 
plate printing, for  ordinary  purposes  of  reproduction. 

The  engraved  plate  is  first  well  heated  by  means  of  the 
hot  plate  already  mentioned.  The  transfer  ink  is  then 
forced  into  the  engraved  parts  until  every  line  is  fully 
charged,  the  ink  having  been  previously  enclosed  in  a 
double  fold  of  soft  rag. 

During   this   part  of   the   operation  great  care  must  be 


COPPERPLATE  TRANSFER   PRINTING  19 

taken  that  the  transfer  ink  does  not  burn  through  over- 
heating, as  this  would  partially  destroy  its  greasy  nature 
and  leave  it  hard  and  brittle.  The  transfer  impression 
would  suffer  in  consequence,  and,  though  to  all  appearance 
perfect  on  the  paper,  it  would  be  weak  and  ineffective  when 
applied  to  the  lithographic  stone.  Such  an  error  of  judg- 
ment is  not  at  all  unusual,  and  should  therefore  be  the 
more  carefully  guarded  against.  It  frequently  occurs  without 
the  knowledge  of  the  operator,  owing,  it  may  be,  to  his  over- 
anxiety  to  complete  his  work  in  as  short  a  time  as  possible. 

The  plate  must  now  be  cleaned,  i.e.  the  surplus  ink  and 
scum  must  all  be  removed.  This  may  be  done  before  the 
plate  is  quite  cool,  and  after  a  little  experience  it  will  be  pos*- 
sible  to  accomplish  the  cleansing  process  without  in  any  way 
disturbing  the  ink  in  the  lines  of  the  engraving.  The  rag 
used  for  cleaning  must  be  tightly  folded  into  the  form  of  a 
pad  and  kept  free  from  creases.  After  final  cleansing  and 
polishing  with  whiting  the  plate  is  ready  for  an  impression. 
The  transfer  paper  requires  damping  until  it  is  quite  limp, 
when  it  is  brought  into  contact  with  the  inked  plate  and 
subjected  to  a  very  heavy  pressure.  The  backing  is  a 
woollen  blanket,  preferably  of  fine  texture ;  this  ensures 
perfect  contact  between  the  plate  and  the  paper.  The  plate 
is  now  very  slightly  warmed  to  dry  the  transfer  paper,  which 
is  allowed  to  peel  off;  this  it  does  very  readily  if,  after 
a  little  while,  the  corners  and  edges  are  but  slightly  eased. 

Oil  of  tar  will  effectually  remove  any  accretions  of  copper- 
plate transfer  ink  which  may  have  hardened  in  the  lines  of 
the  engraving. 

It  may  be  useful  also  to  know  that  it  is  possible  to  use 
a  small  lithographic  press  in  place  of  a  copperplate  press, 
assuming,  of  course,  that  a  sufficiently  heavy  and  uniform 
pressure  can  be  guaranteed.  This  is  not  altogether  an 
innovation,  yet  it  is  not  a  familiar  notion. 


CHAPTEE  V 

THE  LITHOGRAPHIC  PRESS 

Mechanical  Principles — Constructive  Details — Scraper — Tympan — 
Practical  Suggestions — Elastic  Bedding. 

IT  is  not  a  little  surprising  to  find  that  the  mechanical 
principle  of  the  lithographic  press  in  general  use  to-day  is 
almost  identical  with  that  which  the  pioneers  of  the  craft 
employed  so  successfully.  This  is  an  interesting  fact  which 
either  reflects  much  credit  upon  the  ingenuity  of  the  early 
lithographic  printers  or  points  to  an  unreasonable  conservatism 
on  the  part  of  the  present-day  craftsmen.  A  discussion  of 
this  phase  of  the  question  would  be  of  doubtful  interest,  for 
the  practical  printer  has  long  been  accustomed  to  regard  it 
simply  as  a  convenient  appliance  for  the  production  of  a 
heavy  and  readily  adjustable  pressure-. 

A  brief  examination  will  prove  to  what  extent  these 
requirements  are  fulfilled  by  the  modern  lithographic  press 
(Fig.  5). 

The  simplicity  of  its  construction  suggests  a  first  point 
for  favourable  criticism.  In  fact,  its  general  mechanical 
arrangements  are  so  exceedingly  simple  that  the  merest 
tyro  might  readily  understand  their  principles  and 
purpose. 

The  adjustability  of  the  pressure  by  means  of  the  screw  D 
(Fig.  8)  is  both  effective  and  necessary,  owing  to  the  constantly 
varying  thickness  of  the  lithographic  stones. 

The  pressure  of  the  boxwood  scraper  B  on  the  surface  of 

20 


THE    LITHOGRAPHIC   PRESS 


21 


the  stone  is  perfectly  rigid,  and  yet,  owing  to  the  intervention 
of  the  tympan  C,  is  sufficiently  elastic  to  ensure  the  closest 
possible  contact.  Figs.  6  and  7  show  one  or  two  con- 
structive details  by  which  the  hand  lever  A  and  the  cam 
motion  E  bring  up  the  cylinder  F  to  the  bottom  of  the 
carriage  or  bed  of  the  press,  Fig.  8. 

It  is  in  this  position  that  the  movement  of  the  carriage 


gives  the  necessary  pressure  required  to  pull  an  impression. 
The  shaft  H  runs  across  the  press  and  operates  a  similar  cam 
to  E  on  the  opposite  side.  These  two  cams  raise  the  brass 
block  G  and  give  the  requisite  support  to  the  cylinder-  F 
when  the  pressure  is  applied. 

These  are  the  chief  characteristics  of  the  lithographic 
press,  and  as  such  they  require  not  a  little  attention  and 
intelligent  manipulation.  It  is  practically  impossible  to 


22 


PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 


secure    a    steady    and  uniform    pressure  unless    the    scraper 
and  tympan  are  carefully  adjusted. 

The  former  must  be  perfectly  true  with  its  V-shaped  edge 
nicely  rounded,  and  the  latter  tightly  stretched  on  the  frame 
C  so  that  it  will  not  sag  or  bulge  when  pressure  is  applied 
and  the  scraper  passes  over  it.  To  reduce  the  enormous 
friction  caused  by  this  pressure  the  back  of  the  tympan  is 
usually  dressed  with  a  mixture  of  tallow  and  plumbago,  a 
dressing  which  requires  frequent  renewal.  The  plumbago 
possesses  but  little  body,  and  its  salutary  effect  soon  passes 
away.  To  prevent  this  and  to  increase  its  adhesiveness  it 

is  sometimes  mixed  with  a  little 
gum.  A  mineral  black  which  is 
found  in  large  quantities  in  the 
west  of  England  is  even  more 
effective  than  plumbago  for  this 
purpose.  It  forms  a  strong  and 
iiexible  dressing  for  the  leather, 
is  peculiarly  adhesive  and  pro- 
vides an  efficient  lubricant. 

It  is  a  decided  advantage  to 
have  two  tympans  in  use,  one  for 
small  stones  and  another  for  the 
larger  sizes.  It  is  obviously 
unwise  to  pull  a  number  of  impressions  from  small 
stones  with  a  large  tympan,  for  if  this  practice  is  persisted 
in  the  tympan  leather  not  only  loses  its  shape,  but  becomes 
perceptibly  thinner  on  such  parts  as  may  have  been  most 
subjected  to  pressure. 

For  similar  reasons  it  is  advisable  to  have  a  number  of 
boxwood  scrapers  of  different  sizes.  The  "  dents "  produced 
by  a  small  stone  on  a  large  scraper  can  only  be  removed  by 
planing. 

In  lithographic  press  work  some  form  of  elastic  bedding 


FIGS.  6  and  7. 


THE   LITHOGRAPHIC   PRESS  23 

placed  underneath  the  stone  will  not  only  materially  assist 
the  pressure,  but  will  also  minimise  the  risk  of  breakages.  In 
fact,  the  pressure  is  frequently  so  keen  and  of  such  a  direct 
character  as  to  render  this  arrangement  little  short  of  a 
necessity.  Extra  thick  linoleum  will  serve  this  purpose 


FIG.  8. 

admirably,  and  a  zinc  covering  for  this  bedding  will  complete 
the  equipment  of  the  lithographic  press. 

The  operations  directly  associated  with  lithographic  press 
work  are  of  sufficient  importance  to  warrant  a  full  description 
of  each,  and  will  form  the  nucleus  of  the  following  chapter. 


CHAPTER   VI 

LITHOGRAPHIC  PRESS  WORK 

Preparing  the  Design — Treatment  of  an  Ink  Drawing — Chalk  Drawings 
— Alterations — Value  of  Impressions —  Offsets — The  Lithographic 
Hand-roller  —  Proving  —  Registration  —  General  Features  —  Trans- 
ferring— A  Commercial  Necessity — Arrangement — Choice  of  Paper 
— Transference  to  Stone — Preparing  the  Forme. 

THE  operations  directly  associated  with  lithographic  press 
work  are  more  or  less  of  a  preparatory  character.  The 
preparation  of  a  design,  in  its  progressive  stages,  from  the 
lithographic  draughtsman  to  the  printing  machine,  is  usually 
carried  out  in  conjunction  with  the  press.  Only  under 
exceptional  conditions  or  for  some  particular  class  of  work 
is  the  lithographic  press  actually  employed  for  printing 
purposes.  Its  ready  adaptability  to  the  ever-varying  thick- 
ness of  lithographic  stones,  and  the .  manner  in  which  pres- 
sure can  be  applied  at  will,  as  well  as  the  intense  sharpness 
of  such  pressure,  render  it  peculiarly  suitable  for  the  work 
now  under  discussion.  Such  operations  will  be  better  under- 
stood and  probably  more  easily  remembered  if  they  are 
described  in  a  sequence  such  as  might  be  presented  under 
average  commercial  conditions.  Taking  a  design  as  it  leaves 
the  lithographic  draughtsman,  i.e.  in  the  form  of  a  greasy 
drawing  on  stone,  the  first  object  of  the  printer  is  to  so 
prepare  it  as  to  preserve  the  conditions  described  in  Chap.  I. 
page  2.  This  he  may  accomplish  in  the  following  manner. 

Cover  the  whole  stone  with  fresh  strong  gum  and  allow 
it  to  dry.      Then  if    it    be    an    ink    drawing,  wash    off  the 

24 


LITHOGRAPHIC   PRESS   WORK  25 

gum  with  water,  and  remove  the  drawing  ink  from  the 
surface  of  the  design  with  a  few  drops  of  turpentine 
and  a  piece  of  clean  rag.  Proceed  to  roll  up  with  a 
lithographic  hand-roller  charged  with  good  black  printing 
ink.  The  consistency  of  this  printing  ink  can  only  be 
determined  by  the  character  of  the  work  under  treatment. 
It  is  therefore  a  matter  of  experience  rather  than  rule. 
Heavy  designs  covering  large  areas  can  be  worked  up  with 
moderately  thin  ink,  while  work  of  a  finer  description  will 
most  probably  require  a  stronger  ink  for  its  successful 
treatment.  Between  these  two  extremes  there  is  a 
variety  of  conditions  and  effects  which  will  require  a 
ready  recognition  and  an  intelligent  adaptation  or  modifica- 
tion of  any  operation  which  may  be  described.  It  may  even 
be  advisable  to  rub  up  the  work  with  a  piece  of  soft  rag  and 
printing  ink,  but  the  clearness  and  crispness  of  the  drawing 
can  best  be  preserved  by  a  complete  removal  of  the  greasy 
ink  with  which  the  drawing  was  originally  made.  More 
particularly  is  this  desirable  when  heavy,  solid  work  is  in 
close  contact  with  work  of  a  finer  description,  for  the  ex- 
cessively greasy  character  of  the  artist's  drawing  ink  has 
a  dangerous  tendency  to  smear  or  spread  and  to  thicken 
the  design,  unless  a  reasonable  amount  of  care  is  exercised. 
After  rolling  up  the  work  as  well  as  possible,  and  having 
decided  that  it  is  firm  and  strong  and  is  fully  charged 
with  ink,  dry  the  stone  perfectly  and  dust  over  the 
design  with  finely  powdered  resin  or  French  chalk.  With 
a  piece  of  water  of  Ayr  stone  polish  away  any  scum  or 
dirt  which  may  surround  the  work,  and  etch  it  quickly 
with  a  weak  solution  of  nitric  acid.  Cover  up  with  strong 
gum  and  dry  it.  The  design  is  now  ready  either  for  proving 
or  transferring. 

The    treatment    of    chalk    drawings,    grained    stones,    or 
transfers  from  grained  paper  needs  a  slight  variation  •  of  the 


26  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

operations  already  described.  The  preliminary  etching  is 
generally  carried  out  by  the  draughtsman  by  flooding  the 
stone  with  a  mixture  of  gum  and  acid,  after  which  the 
gum  solution  is  allowed  to  dry.  The  chemical  change  which 
takes  place  during  this  etching  is  often  described  as  one  in 
which  the  soap  present  in  lithographic  chalks  is  changed 
to  an  insoluble  compound.  This  chemical  change  is  per- 
haps a  somewhat  contentious  matter,  but  the  effect  and 
not  the  principle  involved  is  to  us  the  matter  of  primary 
importance,  and  this  effect  is  such  as  to  actually  prevent  any 
spreading  of  the  design  on  the  stone  beyond  the  lines  of 
the  original  drawing. 

Eeturning  once  more  to  the  operation,  wash  off  the  gum, 
and,  having  removed  the  excess  of  water  in  the  usual  way, 
roll  up  firmly  with  a  strong  black  ink.  Instead  of  washing 
out  the  drawing  with  turpentine  immediately,  work  off  the 
original  chalk  by  rolling  up  with  a  good  nap  roller  and  taking 
frequent  impressions.  In  this  way  the  grain  of  the  draw- 
ing will  be  gradually  developed  and  rendered  fit  for  further 
operations.  The  stone  can  then  be  passed  to  the  prover 
or  transferrer. 

A  French  writer,  in  referring  to  the  importance  of  really 
good  chalk  drawing  and  printing,  as  well  as  to  its  artistic 
and  technical  value,  once  said  :  "  The  printer  requires  a  fair 
appreciation  of  that  subtle  suggestiveness  which  gradations 
of  tone  can  impart  to  a  chalk  drawing  before  he  can  hope 
to  successfully  reproduce  the  artist's  original  conception.  A 
good  printer  handles  his  roller  over  a  chalk  drawing  with 
the  same  feeling  as  that  with  which  a  violin  player  handles 
his  bow.  By  movements  rapid  or  slow,  and  by  greater  or 
less  pressure  over  certain  parts,  he  charges  the  drawing  to 
the  proper  tone." 

If  at  any  time  the  original  work  requires  alterations, 
they  may  be  executed  in  the  following  manner.  Eoll  up 


LITHOGRAPHIC   PRESS   WORK  27 

the  design  firmly  in  strong,  black  ink,  and,  after  fanning 
the  surface  dry,  dust  it  over  with  French  chalk.  Make 
the  necessary  erasures  with  water  of  Ayr  stone  and  etch 
with  fairly  strong  nitric  acid.  Polish  slightly,  and  wash 
well  with  a  plentiful  supply  of  clean  water.  Pour  over 
the  stone  a  very  weak  solution  of  alum,  and  again  wash 
thoroughly  with  hot  water,  so  that  its  rapid  evaporation 
may  leave  the  work  ready  for  immediate  manipulation. 
Alterations  may  be  made  by  transferring  or  drawing.  In 
either  case  it  is  advisable  to  gum  up  the  work  with  strong 
gum  and  allow  it  to  stand  until  dry.  The  subsequent 
treatment  of  any  alteration  will,  of  course,  depend  upon 
their  character  and  extent.  As  new  work,  they  should 
be  carefully  handled. 

It  is  most  important  that  a  very  weak  solution  of  alum 
should  be  used.  Being  an  alkali,  a  strong  solution  would 
have  a  tendency  to  dissolve  the  greasy  particles  of  the 
drawing  and  cause  them  to  spread  and  thicken. 

It  is  always  advisable  to  take  an  impression  from  each 
design,  whether  it  be  in  ink  or  crayon,  before  it  is  laid  aside 
for  subsequent  manipulation.  These  impressions  will  not 
only  reveal  any  inaccuracies  or  weaknesses  which  might  other- 
wise pass  unnoticed,  but  also  serve  as  a  useful  record  and 
for  comparison  with  other  transfers  or  impressions  which 
may  be  required. 

There  are  other  phases  of  preparatory  work  which  come 
within  the  scope  of  the  lithographic  pressman,  and  as  they 
frequently  constitute  an  intermediary  stage  between  the  first 
drawing  of  the  draughtsman  on  stone  and  the  making  of 
transfer  impressions  to  facilitate  reproduction,  a  description 
at  this  point  will  be  appropriate. 

It  may  be  that  a  key  forme  only  has  been  prepared,  or 
perhaps  an  outline  forme  with  sufficient  detail.  In  either 
case  a  number  of  offsets  equivalent  to  the  number  of  colours 


28  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

necessary  for  the  completion  of  the  design  will  be  required. 
These  are  made  by  taking  good,  solid  impressions  in  stiff 
black  ink  from  the  key  or  outline  forme.  Dust  these  over 
with  a  mixture  of  three  parts  Venetian  red  and  one  part 
lamp-black.  Lay  them  in  convenient  positions  on  a  well- 
polished  dry  stone,  and  run  them  through  the  lithographic 
press  with  a  light  yet  firm  pressure.  The  result  will  be  faint 
yet  sufficiently  clear  offsets  of  an  outline  which  will  enable 
the  lithographic  draughtsman  to  prepare  any  number  of 
formes,  and  these  will  register  or  fit  each  other  and  the  original 
drawing  with  perfect  accuracy.  Such  outlines  will  in  no  way 
affect  the  work  of  the  draughtsman,  and  will  disappear  at  the 
first  application  of  the  gum  sponge  or  moisture  in  any  form. 
A  lithographic  wop-roller  (Fig.  9)  facilitates  the  work  of 

the  pressman  in  the 
preparation  and  de- 
velopment of  original 
drawings  on  stone, 
and  becomes  an  ab- 
solute necessity  when  crayon  drawings  on  grained  stones  are 
operated  upon.  The  preparation  and  preservation  of  a  roller 
of  this  description  requires  a  more  than  average  amount  of 
care  and  attention.  The  best  rollers  are  covered  with 
French  calf-skin  with  a  soft,  velvet-like  nap,  and  may  be 
prepared  as  follows.  Run  the  roller  in  crude  castor  oil  for 
a  short  time  until  the  leather  becomes  soft  and  pliable,  then 
work  out  the  superfluous  oil  by  repeated  rolling  in  medium 
varnish,  occasionally  scraping  off  the  varnish  with  a  broad 
blunt  knife.  Continue  this  for  a  day  or  two,  then  gradually 
work  into  the  skin  some  good  non-drying  black  printing 
ink.  The  roller  thus  prepared  may  be  somewhat  harsh,  but 
a  few  days'  use  will  bring  it  into  condition.  An  occasional 
application  of  tallow  or  lard,  say  about  once  a  week,  will 
keep  the  roller  skin  soft  and  pliable,  and  counteract  the 


LITHOGRAPHIC   PRESS   WORK  29 

hardening  effect  of  constant  contact  with  the  damp  surface  of 
the  lithographic  stone  and  the  oxidisation  of  the  printing  ink. 
*  Proving  the  work  of  the  lithographic  artist,  though  not 
always  an  absolute  necessity,  is  a  helpful  and  most  important 
function.  In  its  progressive  stage  it  enables  both  designer 
and  lithographer  to  observe  the  realisation  of  their  colour 
schemes,  and  to  amplify  or  minimise  if  necessary  the  effects 
they  desire  to  produce.  Errors  of  judgment  or  of  detail  can 
be  rectified  before  the  work  reaches  a  more  advanced  stage. 
Again,  a  finished  proof  offers  something  of  a  tangible  character 
for  an«  expression  of  approval  or  disapproval,  and  serves  as 
a  useful  and  helpful  guide  to  the  printer  throughout  the 
subsequent  operations. 

This  will  show  clearly  the  importance  of  the  prover's 
work,  and  though  it  is  not  by  any  means  an  unusual 
proceeding  to  prove  up  even  the  most  elaborate  designs  in 
the  lithographic  printing  machines,  it  is,  for  obvious  reasons, 
more  convenient  to  confine  such  work  to  the  press.  It  may 
therefore  be  regarded  as  an  intermediate  operation,  distinctly 
apart  from  the  preparation  of  the  original  drawing  which 
precedes  it,  and  the  arrangement  for  machine  printing  which 
follows.  The  distinctive  and  pre-eminently  the  most  im- 
portant feature  of  proving  is  the  manner  in  which  one  colour 
is  registered  with  another ;  and  although  the  methods  usually 
adopted  are  of  the  simplest  possible  character,  the  most 
scrupulous  care  is  requisite  for  their  successful  application. 
It  appears  to  be  an  almost  ridiculous  plan,  so  simple  is  it,  to 
cut  away  the  angles  formed  by  the  register  lines  after  the 
first  printing  (Fig.  1 0 A),  and  then  to  place  them  to  correspond- 
ing lines  on  each  colour  forme,  or  to  pierce  the  register  lines  as 
in  Fig.  10B,  passing  a  fine  needle  through  each  puncture  into 
corresponding  holes  drilled  in  the  stones  and  allowing  the 
sheets  to  fall  into  position, — yet  these  operations  demand 
constant  care  and  attention. 


PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 


The  mixing  of  colours  for  proving,  and  the  general 
principle  of  their  application,  are  matters  which  are  almost 
entirely  under  the  control  of  the  printer.  Their  selection 
and  the  manner  in  which  they  are  employed  are  both  deter- 
mined by  the  individual  character  of  the  work.  It  is 
impossible  to  indicate  any  "  rule  of  thumb  "  guide  for  their 
application  or  manipulation.  The  individual  fancy  of  the 
artist,  or  the  wish  of  a  customer,  are  the  only  probable 
complications  which  may  have  to  be  considered.  Then 
again,  many  phases  of  the  work  are  more  or  less  experimental, 

when  the  resourcefulness  of  the 
printer  may  be  tested,  and  the 
mechanical  features  of  his  work 
be  relieved  by  the  exercise  of 
intelligent  application,  if  not  of 
artistic  perception.  Very  rarely 
is  it  possible  to  print  from  the 
litho-draughtsman's  original  draw- 
ing, and  even  when  it  may  be 
convenient  to  do  so,  it  is,  in  the 
majority  of  cases,  unadvisable  on 
account  of  the  element  of  risk 

involved.  There  is  an  ever-present  danger  of  the  stone 
breaking, — a  catastrophe  which  would  necessitate  an  entire 
reproduction  of  the  design,  and  even  under  the  most 
favourable  conditions  the  constant  attrition  produced  by 
the  rollers,  etc..  would  have  an  appreciable  effect  on  the 
work,  and  in  course  of  time  destroy  its  value  for  graphic 
reproduction. 

Many  other  equally  cogent  reasons  why  duplicates  of  the 
original  should  be  made  for  printing  purposes  present  them- 
selves. The  chief  of  these  is  an  essentially  commercial  one. 
To  reproduce  half  a  million  impressions  from  a  single  small 
drawing  would  obviously  depreciate  the  commercial  value  of 


FIG.  10A. 


FIG.  10B. 


LITHOGRAPHIC   PRESS   WORK  31 

lithographic  printing  very  considerably,  and  although  there  is 
no  record  of  the  circumstances  under  which  the  duplicating 
of  original  work  by  means  of  transfers  was  first  evolved,  it  is 
only  reasonable  to  suppose  that  it  was  the  direct  outcome  of 
a  necessity  which  was  as  peremptory  in  its  demands  as  it  has 
been  far-reaching  in  its  effects.  The  method  is  one  by  which 
any  number  of  impressions  can  be  made  on  a  suitably  pre- 
pared paper,  and  with  a  sufficiently  greasy  pigment.  These 
can  be  re-transferred  to  a  lithographic  stone,  and  in  this  way 
facsimiles  of  the  original  may  be  secured  and  arranged  in 
the  manner  most  convenient  for  machine  printing.  Great 
care  is  necessary  in  making  these  transfer  impressions. 
They  must  be  perfectly  solid,  yet  not  overcharged  with 
ink,  i.e.  they  must  be  clean  and  sharp,  and  as  nearly  an 
exact  replica  of  the  original  work  as  it  is  possible  to  make 
them. 

That  the  further  description  of  these  operations  may  be 
as  lucid  and  practical  as  possible,  we  will  apply  it  to 
ordinary  work-a-day  conditions,  and  suppose  that  a  design  in 
three  workings  has  been  lithographed  and  prepared  for  trans- 
ferring as  already  described.  The  size  of  the  work  is.7J  in. 
by  4J  in.,  then  the  paper  on  which  it  is  to  be  printed  ought 
to  be  double  crown,  20  in.  by  30  in.  This  will  allow  1|  in. 
for  the  gripper  and  J  in.  margin  at  the  back  and  sides. 
Sixteen  transfers  can  be  pulled  from  each  colour  forme  on  a 
thin,  transparent  transfer  paper.  Mark  out  a  sheet  of  stout 
paper  as  in  Fig.  1 1 ,  and  arrange  the  transfers  in  the  position 
indicated  by  the  dotted  lines.  The  gripper  margins  A  A 
are  determined  by  the  construction  of  the  machines,  and  may 
be  varied  accordingly. 

Varnished  transfer  papers  may  be  laid  down  on  a  slightly 
warmed  dry  stone,  and  if  French  transfer  paper  be  used  the 
stone  must  be  slightly  damped.  If  the  sheet  of  transfers  is 
laid  down  to  a  board — Fig.  1 2 — uniformity  of  gripper  margin 


PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 


will  be  assured  throughout  the  series,  and  the  work  of  the 
machine  printer  facilitated. 

Pull  it  through  the  lithographic  press  with  a  gradually 
increasing  pressure  in  the  usual  way.     The  varnish  transfer 

A 


FIG.  11. 

paper  will  be  sufficiently  tacky  to  adhere  slightly  to  the  sur- 
face of  the  stone,  so  that  the  pressure  may  be  repeated  again 
and  again  with  perfect  safety.  It  may  not  be  possible  to 
remove  the  base  upon  which  they  were  arranged,  as  it  is 
usual  to  secure  them  in  position  with 
paste.  At  this  point  the  manipulation  of 
the  two  varieties  of  paper  differs  slightly. 
The  thin, .  transparent  variety  is  usually 
fastened  down  to  its  paper  base  with 
syrup,  glucose,  or  some  sticky  composition 
of  a  similar  character.  This  paper  back- 
ing can  be  removed  immediately  after 
sufficient  pressure  has  been  applied  to 
fix  the  transfers  to  the  stone.  As  this  transfer  paper  is 
adhesive  it  is  necessary  to  damp  the  surface  of  the  litho- 
stone  before  it  is  laid  down,  when,  of  course,  it  will  readily 
adhere,  even  under  a  moderately  light  pressure. 


FIG.  12. 


LITHOGRAPHIC   PRESS   WORK  33 

The  further  preparation  of  work,  after  being  transferred 
in  this  manner,  is  in  many  respects  similar  to  the  treatment 
of  new  work,  but  with  this  important  difference.  A  new 
transfer  should  almost  invariably  be  worked  up  with  a  soft 
rag  and  black  ink,  the  latter  being  thinned  down  with  turpen- 
tine and  varnish.  Gum  up  the  work,  and  allow  the  gum  to 
dry.  Eoll  a  piece  of  soft  rag  into  a  pad,  and  charge  it  with 
printing  ink  which  has  been  thinned  down.  Wipe  off'  the 
gum  on  the  surface  of  the  stone,  leaving  only  a  thin  film  over 
the  work.  Rub  up  the  transfers  with  the  rag  already  pre- 
pared, and  when  fully  charged  with  ink  cover  them  with 
fresh  gum.  If  possible  they  should  stand  for  one  or  two 
hours,  when  the  rolling  up  and  etching  may  be  proceeded 
with. 

Accuracy  of  register  can  be  ensured  by  the  second  and 
third  sets  of  transfers  being  patched  up  to  the  first  forme  in 
the  following  manner. 

Make  two  fairly  strong  black  impressions  of  this  forme  on 
a  stout  unstretchable  paper.  Fix  these  up  on  a  glass  frame 
in  such  a  position  as  to  allow  the  light  to  pass  through  them, 
and  carefully  place  each  transfer  in  its  exact  position.  They 
can  then  be  laid  down  on  separate  stones  in  the  same  way  as 
the  first  set.  These  are  the  simple  outlines  of  the  trans- 
ferring process.  In  detail  they  may,  of  course,  be  modified  to 
meet  the  exigencies  of  peculiar  conditions,  which  in  litho- 
graphy are  frequently  the  controlling  powers,  and  at  all  times 
are  matters  of  vital  importance. 


CHAPTER  VII 

MACHINE  FEINTING 

The  Printing  Machine — The  Halligan — Some  Mechanical  Phases — Speed 
— Pressure — Levelling  the  Stones— Cylinder  Brake — Inking  Kollers 
— Damping. 

CONCERNING  the  structural  qualities  of  the  various  types  of 
lithographic  printing  machines  now  in  use,  much  might  be 
written  and  divers  opinions  expressed.  In  this  respect, 
however,  it  would  be  invidious  to  suggest  that  one  maker's 
machines  were  better  than  another's,  and  such  would  be  the 
natural  trend  of  a  discussion  on  these  lines.  The  machines 
all  have,  it  is  true,  many  points  in  common  where  com- 
parisons would  be  legitimate  and  easy.  Yet,  on  the  other 
hand,  they  each  possess  distinct  advantages  which  will  no 
doubt  appeal  to  the  printer  individually,  in  proportion  to 
their  suitability  or  otherwise  for  his  particular  work.  Con- 
viction will  follow  experience  in  these  matters,  and  any 
decision  arrived  at  after  this  fashion  may  be  regarded  as  a 
useful  and  valuable  acquisition. 

The  illustration  on  page  35  (Fig.  13)  gives  a  fair  general 
idea  of  the  modern  lithographic  machine. 

Fig.  14  illustrates  a  somewhat  novel  type  of  lithographic 
printing  machine,  in  which  the  gripper  is  entirely  dispensed 
with,  the  sheet  being  held  to  gauges  by  the  operator  until 
caught  between  the  small  cylinder  and  the  stone,  when 
pressure  is  immediately  applied.  The  stone  is  simply  blocked 
up  in  the  bed  of  the  machine  and  the  position  of  the  print 

31 


MACHINE  PRINTING 


35 


on  the  paper  assured  by  moving  the  gauges.  This  useful 
little  jobbing  machine  is  a  decided  innovation,  and  the 
simplicity  of  its  construction  is  only  equalled  by  the  precision 
of  its  movements. 

Lithographic  machine  printing  presents  many  peculiar 
features,  each  one  of  which  requires  careful  and  constant 
attention  for  their  successful  operation.  Some  of  its  purely 
mechanical  aspects — the  care  of  the  machine  and  its  accessories, 


FIG.  13. 

together  with  their  various  functions  and  applications — offer 
a  wide  scope  for  resourcefulness  and  ability  of  a  high  order. 
The  primary  purpose  of  the  machine  itself  was  undoubtedly 
to  accelerate  the  reproductive  power  of  lithography  from  a 
commercial  point  of  view ;  and  throughout  the  entire  course 
of  its  development  the  aim  of  the  engineer  has  been  to 
produce  a  printing  machine  with  an  ever-increasing  capacity 


36  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

for  reproduction.  It  does  not  follow,  however,  that  the 
printer's  responsibility  has  been  proportionately  increased. 
Mechanical  appliances  have  now  so  far  superseded  hand 
labour  that,  apart  from  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the  principles 
of  lithography,  which  is  in  itself  essential,  successful  litho- 
graphic machine  printing  is  largely  due  to  resourcefulness, 
alert  perception,  and  a  skilful  blending  of  mechanical  and 
technical  knowledge. 

Passing  over  the  vast  amount  of  detail  which  is  usually 
and  almost  invariably  associated  with  machine  printing,  but 


FIG.  14. 

which  offers  little  that  is  new  to  the  practical  worker,  it 
might  be  advantageous  to  discuss  a  few  points  which  are  too 
often  overlooked. 

Speed,  as  has  already  been  pointed  out,  is  a  very  important 
factor  in  lithographic  machine  printing.  It  has  become  quite 
a  necessity,  and  everything  which  conduces  to  it  should 
receive  the  most  careful  consideration.  Economy  of  power  is 
too  seldom  regarded  as  a  standard  of  efficiency  in  the  printer. 
At  any  rate,  as  far  as  this  is  concerned  it  is  doubtful  if  he 


MACHINE   PRINTING  37 

fully  realises  the  effect  of  what  may  appear  to  him  as 
insignificant  matters.  A  little  pressure  more  or  less  on  the 
stone  may  be  in  itself  a  mere  trifle,  so  also  would  be  a  careless 
arrangement  of  the  inking  rollers  or  indiscriminate  damping 
of  the  stones,  yet,  when  taken  together,  what  a  considerable 
waste  of  power  they  might  cause ;  —  a  waste  which  is 
altogether  unnecessary  and  could  easily  be  obviated  by  care 
and  forethought.  Excessive  pressure  is  frequently  resorted  to 
in  order  to  "  bring  up  "  an  impression  which  is  defective  owing 
to  some  error  of  judgment  in  its  preparation.  It  undoubtedly 
secures  the  desired  effect,  but  at  what  a  cost !  There  is  a 
proportionately  heavier  drag  on  the  machine  and  a  greater 
strain  on  its  most  vital  parts.  The  following  view  of  this 
matter  may  be  regarded  as  somewhat  exaggerated,  but  it  is  by 
no  means  an  uncommon  state  of  affairs,  and  will  at  least  serve 
to  emphasise  the  importance  of  this  point.  It  is  a  popular 
fallacy  to  suppose  that  in  adjusting  the  litho-stone  to  the 
bed  of  the  printing  machine  it  should  be  made  perfectly  level. 
As  a  matter  of  fact  a  much  easier  and  more  satisfactory 
impression  can  be  made  from  a  stone  which  is  worked  just  a 
little  higher  at  the  front  or  gripper  edge  than  at  the  back, 
and  for  this  reason.  The  drag  on  the  cylinder  as  it  makes 
the  impression  is  appreciably  greater  at  the  back  than  at  the 
front,  and  when  the  pressure  is  heavy  it  has  a  tendency  to 
leave  the  back  edge  with  a  very  decided  jerk.  The  remedy 
is  obvious  and  simple.  As  already  suggested,  the  stone 
should  be  set  in  the  machine  with  the  least  possible  inclination 
towards  the  front.  This  adjustment  is  easily  effected  by  a 
judicious  arrangement  of  a  few  layers  of  brown  paper.  Just 
think  for  a  moment  of  the  effect  likely  to  be  produced  by  such 
a  jerk  or  jar,  which  would  under  ordinary  working  conditions 
occur  from  twelve  to  fourteen  times  per  minute  whilst  the 
machine  was  in  motion !  Abnormal  pressure  would  of  course 
intensify  the  strain,  and  sooner  or  later  produce  results  of  a 


38  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

decidedly  disastrous  character.  Under  the  most  favourable 
conditions  this  continual  springing  would  tend  to  move  the 
stone  out  of  position,  and  thus  affect  the  register  of  one  forme 
with  another. 

Another  certain  result  of  this  condition  of  things  is, 
that  the  sharp  pressure  on  the  back  edge  of  the  stone 
would  almost  certainly  cause  an  appreciable  indentation  in 
the  cylinder  covering.  This  would  eventually  cut  through, 
or  at  least  interfere  with  the  working  of  a  larger  sheet  at 
some  future  time. 

The  mechanism  for  raising  or  lowering  the  lithographic 
stone  in  the  machine  for  the  adjustment  of  pressure  is  com- 
paratively simple  (Fig.  15). 

There  are  two  screws  similar  to  A  which  pass  right 

D  through  the  feet  of  the  stone 
carriage  B  B.  A  movement 
of  the  screws  will  therefore 


G  C  cause  a  corresponding  move- 

FIG.  15.  ' 

ment  of  the  stone  carriage 

on    the  blocks  or  inclines  C  C.      The  lock-nut  D  holds  the 
screw  securely  once  the  pressure  is  adjusted. 

So  few  printers  really  understand  the  proper  adjustment 
of  a  cylinder  brake  that  some  information  concerning  it  will 
no  doubt  prove  acceptable.  In  the  first  place,  a  continuous 
action  brake  which  can  be  released  at  certain  intervals  is  most 
suitable.  It  holds  the  cylinders  perfectly  rigid  whilst  the 
machine  is  running  free,  and  applies  a  sufficient  check  at 
the  points  required.  The  intermittent  movement  referred  to 
is  obviated  in  various  ways.  Fig.  13  shows  an  example  of 
one  which  is  both  simple  and  effective.  It  might  be  well 
also  to  explain  the  principle  and  purpose  of  the  cylinder 
brake.  It  is  almost  impossible  to  cut  mechanical  gearing 
which  will  run  easily  and  yet  be  entirely  free  from  dogger. 
Consequently  the  revolution  of  a  printing  machine  cylinder 


MACHINE   PRINTING 


39 


would  be  more  or  less  jerky  unless  steadied  in  some  way. 
This  is  especially  the  case  when  it  reaches  the  stone,  and, 
owing  to  the  pressure  applied,  lifts  a  little  in  the  gearing. 
A  recognition  of  this  simple  matter  will  enable  an  intelligent 
workman  to  arrange  the  brake  action  with  judgment  and  effect. 


FIG.  16A. 

A  comparison  of  the  old  arrangement  of  inking  rollers 
(Fig.  16A)  with  the  new  (Fig.  16s)  is  in  itself  an  object 
lesson  in  this  question  of  power  and  its  economical  applica- 
tion. It  is  but  reasonable  to  suppose  that  the  power  re- 
quired to  move  a  set  of  rollers  arranged  in  the  old-fashioned 
manner  (Fig.  16 A)  will  be  infinitely  greater  than  that 


FIG.  16B. 

which  would  be  needed  for  such  an  arrangement  as  shown 
in  Fig.  16s. 

Pursuing  this  matter  still  further,  the  question  of  in- 
discriminate damping  presents  itself.  Granted  that  the 
influence  here  is  an  indirect  one,  yet  it  is  a  cause  which 


40  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

frequently  leads  to  an  undesirable  finish.  Every  printer 
knows  something  of  the  effect  produced  by  excess  of  water 
upon  printing  inks.  It  hardens  and  stiffens  them  by 
accelerating  oxidisation.  In  course  of  time  their  free  working 
on  the  rollers  is  interfered  with,  and  loss  of  power  is  by  no 
means  the  worst  result.  Weak  and  impoverished  impres- 
sions, abnormal  wear  and  tear  of  the  printing  forme,  and 
excessive  saturation  of  the  paper  may  follow. 

In  lithography  generally,  and  in  lithographic  machine 
printing  particularly,  the  damping  of  the  stone  is  a  matter 
which  requires  constant  and  careful  attention ;  any  arrange- 
ments for  this  purpose  should  therefore  be  as  effective  as 


FIG.-  17. 

possible.  The  damping  rollers  should  be  thoroughly  cleaned 
each  day,  in  order  to  remove  any  scum  or  grease  which 
may  have  been  collected  from  the  printing  forme. 

The  arrangement  of  damping  rollers  shown  in  Fig.  17  is 
a  decidedly  practical  one.  The  upper  roller  consists  of  metal, 
usually  brass  or  zinc.  It  collects  any  accumulation  of  ink 
or  scum  from  the  actual  dampers,  and  can  be  cleaned  at  any 
time  without  serious  interference  with  the  progress  of  the 
work.  Its  adoption,  however,  has  not  been  very  general, 
although  it  would  be  difficult  to  ascribe  any  good  reasons 
for  such  a  fact. 


CHAPTER    VIII 

MACHINE  PRINTING — continued 

Register — Atmospheric  Conditions — The  Key — The  Gripper — Starting 
the  Machine— Fixing  the  Stone— Strength  of  Colour— Grit— Making 
Ready — Regulation  of  Speed. 

IT  is  almost  impossible  to  overestimate  the  importance  of 
register  in  lithographic  machine  printing,  and  any  suggestions 
which  are  likely  to  be  of  assistance  to  the  printer  in  this 
matter  will  no  doubt  be  welcomed. 

Variable  atmospheric  conditions,  insufficiently  matured 
paper,  or  constitutional  defects  in  the  machine,  are  frequent 
sources  of  inaccurate  register.  These  may  be  to  some  extent 
unavoidable  and  therefore  beyond  the  printer's  control,  but 
there  are  numerous  other  points  which  have  an  important 
bearing  upon  the  accurate  fitting  of  one  colour  or  forme  with 
another,  and  therefore  require  care  and  attention.  The 
following  method  of  procedure  is  well  worth  consideration, 
as  it  has  decided  advantages  over  many  others. 

The  key,  or  outline  forme,  to  which  the  colour  formes  have 
been  set  up,  is  put  into  the  machine  at  the  beginning  of  the 
printing  operations.  The  exact  position  of  the  design  on 
the  sheet  is  arranged,  and  twenty  or  thirty  impressions  taken 
on  a  reliable  paper.  With  these  impressions  as  a  guide  it 
is  a  comparatively  easy  matter  to  register  each  colour  accur- 
ately. This  effects  a  saving  both  in  time  and  material,  and 
rarely  fails  to  produce  satisfactory  results.  During  the  early 
stages  of  the  printing,  when  it  is  difficult  to  detect  any 

41 


42  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

slight  movement  of  the  stone  in  the  machine,  a  sheet 
bearing  an  impression  of  the  key  may  be  printed  in  the 
usual  way,  when  any  variation  in  register  will  be  re- 
vealed at  a  glance.  The  relative  positions  of  the  side  lay 
and  gripper  seldom  receive  the  consideration  they  ought  to 
have.  The  gripper  and  side  lay  should  be  exactly  at  right 
angles  to  each  other,  and  any  divergence  whatever  from  this 
rule  simply  courts  disaster.  If  they  form  an  acute  angle 
there  is  a  danger  of  the  sheet  moving  forward  a  little  as  the 
gripper  closes.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  they  are  fixed  at  an 
obtuse  angle,  there  is  a  proportionate  risk  of  the  sheet 


FIG.  18.' 

falling  back  as  the  gripper  closes.  If  any  degree  of  uniform- 
ity could  be  guaranteed  in  these  movements,  then  all  would 
still  be  well,  but  unfortunately  no  such  guarantee  can  be 
given,  owing  to  a  possible  variation  in  the  cutting  of  different 
batches  of  paper. 

Another  matter  of  a  similar  character  and  quite  as 
important  in  its  issues  is  more  directly  connected  with  the 
gripper. 

The  type  of  gripper  shown  in  Fig.  18  is  probably  the 
best  for  general  use.  It  enables  the  printer  to  use  two  or 
more  pins  upon  which  to  rest  his  sheet,  according  to  the 
particular  requirements  of  his  work.  Two  pins  are  usually 


MACHINE   PRINTING 


43 


sufficient  and  answer  best,  for  the  following  reasons.  It 
is  by  no  means  unusual  to  find  that  the  paper,  trimmed 
though  it  may  be,  has  slightly  convex  or  concave  edges, 
owing  either  to  insufficient  damping  or  an  inaccurate  setting 
of  the  knife  in  the  guillotine  cutting  machine.  This  can, 
of  course,  be  avoided,  but  the  point  at  present  under  con- 
sideration is  one  of  possible  effects.  This  contingency  and 
its  effect  are  considerably  exaggerated  in  Figs.  19A  and 
19B,  but  for  purposes  of  illustration  the  suggestiveness 
of  the  two  sketches  is  not  at  all  too  emphatic. 

Start  the  machine  with  a  light  pressure,  for  once  the 
stone  is  locked  up  a  certain  amount  of  danger  will  always 
exist  if  at  any  time  it 
is  necessary  to  reduce  the 
pressure.  The  stone  may 
still  be  held  by  the  blocks, 
even  after  the  bed  of  the 
machine  has  been  lowered, 
only  to  come  down  with 
a  snap  when  pressure  is 
applied.  Such  a  danger 
might,  of  course,  be  averted 
by  slackening  the  screws  and  blocks ;  but  then  the  stone 
would  almost  certainly  move  out  of  position  and  the  regis- 
tration of  the  forme  be  altered. 

Narrow  slips  of  paper  folded  two  or  three  times,  and 
inserted  between  the  block  and  the  stone,  will  often  check 
any  tendency  the  latter  may  have  to  lift  when  the  screws 
are  tightened. 

Of  the  many  annoyances  associated  with  the  lithographic 
machine  printer's  work,  grit  is  probably  the  most  troublesome, 
inasmuch  as  its  presence  is  almost  imperceptible,  while  its 
effect  is  extensive  and  often  disastrous.  Its  sharp  grains 
become  embedded  in  the  inking-roller  skins,  and  plough  tiny 


FIG.  19. 


44 


PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 


furrows  across  the  printing  forme,  doing  much  damage  before 
the  printer  realises  the  presence  of  any  foreign  matter  on  the 


r*       T 

FIG.  20A. — Patent  conical  counter  shafting. 

inking-rollers.  Prevention  is  a  simple  matter  enough,  but  a 
cure  is  rarely,  if  ever,  accomplished.  Dust  the  rollers  and 
examine  them  carefully  before  commencing  operations,  and  in 


FIG.  20B. — Patent  conical  counter  shafting. 

this  way  ensure   perfect   cleanliness.      It  may  seem  a  trifle, 
but  it  is  none  the  less    an  important  one,  and  perhaps  the 


MACHING   PRINTING 


45 


reader  has    already    realised  that    "trifles    make    perfection, 
and  perfection  is  no  trifle." 


In  making  ready  on  a  lithographic  printing  machine,  as 
in  almost  every  phase  of  industrial  life,  method  is  the  great 
secret  of  success.  Method  conquers  the  most  stubborn  diffi- 


46  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

culties,  and,  though  it  is  not  at  all  times  profoundly  interest- 
ing in  its  application,  yet  it  more  than  repays  any  monotony 
it  may  involve.  In  the  matter  of  lithographic  printing,  at 
any  rate,  a  few  methods  of  an  essentially  simple  character 
might  be  cultivated  with  advantage.  This  chapter  is  not 
intended  as  a  complete  record  of  such  methods,  but  a  number 
of  items  are  discussed  therein  which,  though  simple,  are 
intensely  practical,  and  likely  to  suggest  more  to  the  reader 
than  is  found  described  in  the  text. 

The  question  of  speed  may  sometimes  seriously  handicap 
progress.  It  is  a  self-evident  fact  that  the  solid  impression 
of  a  heavy  poster  cannot  be  made  at  the  same  speed  as 
a  light  tint  in  chromo  work.  Speed  cones  are  usually  fixed 
to  a  counter-shaft  to  regulate  the  speed  of  the  machine  as 
required.  Figs.  20A  and  20s  show  an  improved  arrange- 
ment of  this  character,  in  which  tapering  drums  A  A  are 
substituted  for  cones,  the  belt  being  moved  and  held  in  any 
position  by  the  screw  and  forks  B  and  C.  D  is  the  driving 
pulley  which  transmits  the  power  to  the  machine. 

Electricity  as  a  motive  power  for  printing  machinery  is 
quietly  yet  irresistibly  winning  its  way  into  general  favour, 
and  for  very  cogent  reasons.  It  is.  the  most  convenient  form 
of  motive  power,  and  can  be  transmitted  for  long  distances 
without  any  appreciable  loss.  It  takes  up  little  space,  and 
almost  entirely  dispenses  with  belts  and  shafting.  It  is  also 
essentially  economical,  because  it  can  be  applied  to  the 
smallest  press  just  as  easily  as  to  a  60'  by  40'  poster 
machine  (Fig.  21). 


CHAPTER  IX 

LITHOGRAPHIC  COLOUR  PRINTING 

A  Commercial  Value — Peculiar  Features — Colour  Sequence — Controlling 
Elements — A  Question  of  Kegister — Suitable  Paper. 

As  a  commercial  phase  of  lithographic  printing,  colour 
printing  offers  a  vast  and  ever-widening  field  of  usefulness. 
Nor  is  it  altogether  deficient  in  these  artistic  qualities  which 
are  pre-eminently  suggestive,  as  well  as  attractive  and  artistic. 
Colour  printing,  in  its  application  to  lithography,  is  in  many 
respects  peculiar.  It  is  not  what  might  be  described  as  a 
self-contained  process ;  for  its  successful  realisation  depends 
as  much  upon  the  harmonious  and  skilful  combination  of 
colours  in  the  design  as  upon  the  manipulation  of  the  printing 
inks,  the  sequence  of  the  colour  formes,  and  their  accurate  fit 
or  register  during  the  actual  printing.  The  most  excellent 
printing  would  produce  barely  passable  results  unless  the 
design  was  effectively  arranged,  and  prepared  with  some  con- 
sideration for  the  conditions  under  which  it  might  be  printed. 
Nor  is  it  at  all  unlikely  that  a  design,  however  smart  and 
artistic  it  might  appear  in  its  original  form,  would  be  irre- 
trievably spoiled  by  clumsy  handling  or  careless  printing. 
The  subject  for  immediate  consideration  is  the  practical  em- 
ployment of  printing  inks  for  the  reproduction  of  coloured 
designs,  their  qualities,  peculiarities,  and  relative  values,  as 
well  as  the  means  employed  to  make  them  amenable  to 
commercial  conditions.  An  intelligent  appreciation  of  these 
points  will  not  only  extend  the  possibilities  of  printing  inks, 

47 


48  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

but  will  also  enable  the  machineman  to  accentuate  their 
attractive  and  suggestive  power. 

"  Colour  is  to  design  what  salt  is  to  food,"  and  successful 
colour  printing  has  been  very  aptly  described  as  the  adapta- 
tion of  printing  ink  to  the  ever-varying  character  of  work 
and  conditions  of  employment.  This  very  practical  definition 
will  form  the  keynote  of  a  chapter  which,  by  the  very 
nature  of  things,  must  be  to  some  extent  authoritative  and 
comprehensive.  The  colour  sequence,  i.e.  the  order  in  which 
the  colours  must  be  employed  to  secure  the  best  and  most 
economical  results,  is  of  primary  importance  in  colour  print- 
ing. On  broad  lines,  the  principle  usually  followed  is  one  in 
which  the  opaque  colours  are  printed  first,  and  upon  these 
all  secondary  effects  are  built  up.  This  building  up  of 
colours  plays  also  a  most  important  part.  Its  relation  to 
colour  sequence  is  a  necessary  and  influential  one.  For 
example,  it  might  not  be  absolutely  essential  that  even  a 
yellow  should  be  printed  first,  if  it  did  not  form  the  base  for 
the  building  up  of  a  green  by  the  superposition  of  blues,  of 
an  orange  effect  in  conjunction  with  red,  or  as  a  secondary 
flesh  tone  under  the  buff. 

The  difference  between  printing  a  blue  over  a  red  or  vice 
versd  is  also  very  striking.  One  produces  a  purplish-black 
brown,  and  the  other  a  rich  chocolate-brown.  Other  com- 
plications of  a  similar  character  are  common,  but  these  will 
indicate  with  sufficient  clearness  the  possible  modifications  of 
colour  sequence. 

Another  feature  upon  which  colour  sequence  in  printing 
largely  depends  is  the  point  at  which  the  outline  forme  can 
be  most  effectively  introduced.  It  is  advisable  to  print  the 
outline  forme  at  as  early  a  stage  as  possible  for  obvious 
reasons.  Perfect  registration  is  far  from  easy  to  secure. 
Eed  in  the  lips,  blues  in  the  eyes,  and  isolated  touches  of 
colour  in  various  parts  of  the  design  must  fit  the  browns,  and 


LITHOGRAPHIC   COLOUR   PRINTING  49 

therefore  fit  each  other,  and  yet  they  may  have  no  direct 
relation  to  each  other  in  the  printing.  A  remedy  has  been 
already  suggested,  but  once  an  outline  forme  is  printed  the 
cause  of  bad  registration  is  to  some  extent  removed,  and  a 
remedy  quite  unnecessary.  When  worked  on  reasonable 
lines  it  is  frequently  an  advantage  to  make  the  outline  one  of 
the  earlier  printings,  so  that  any  harshness  of  contour,  etc., 
may  be  toned  down  by  the  succeeding  greys.  It  is  often 
a  matter  of  personal  opinion,  or  perhaps  of  circumstance, 
which  decides  the  final  printings.  The  pink  may  be  reserved 
to  impart  brilliancy  and  warmth  to  the  prints,  or  it  may  be 
equally  suitable  to  hold  back  a  grey,  and,  by  regulating  its 
tone  and  strength,  soften  down  any  tendency  to  hardness, 
pick  out  the  darker  prints,  and  emphasise  the  shadows. 
Even  these  suggestions,  although  usually  regarded  as  standard 
ideas,  must  be  subjected  to  modifications  under  certain 
conditions. 

Here  is  a  practical  instance.  Unless  paper  is  unusually 
well  seasoned  and  of  first-rate  quality,  the  temperature  of  the 
workroom  equable,  and  the  printing  machine  in  good  order — a 
combination  of  excellences  which  is  unfortunately  rarely  met 
with — the  colour  sequence  must  be  of  a  fairly  elastic  nature. 
To  print  a  gold  first  is  quite  usual,  because  the  bronze  powder 
will  persistently  adhere  to  any  preceding  printings.  From 
that  standpoint  alone  such  a  procedure  would  be  eminently 
practical  and  convenient,  but  suppose  for  a  moment  that  the 
gold  must  fit  a  later  printing  with  absolute  accuracy,  e.g.  an 
outline  forme,  or  as  forming  the  base  for  some  ornamental 
scheme,  then  the  difficulties  which  arise  are  somewhat  trying, 
and  for  this  reason.  The  paper  being  new,  the  most  serious 
distortion  of  any  kind  is  likely  to  occur  during  the  first 
printings,  and  so  long  ae  yellows,  fleshes,  or  other  colours  of 
a  similar  character  are  printed  first,  no  serious  difficulty 
is  likely  to  arise ;  but  with  the  gold  printing  it  may  -be 
4 


50  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

altogether  different.  It  is  quite  possible  to  make  both 
yellow  and  flesh  dry  dead,  i.e.  without  even  sufficient  tack  to 
catch  the  almost  impalpable  bronze  powder.  At  the  same 
time,  care  must  be  exercised  that  the  colouring  matter  is  not 
left  dry  on  the  surface  of  the  paper  owing  to  its  separation 
from  the  reducing  medium.  This  plan  has  been  adopted 
under  actual  commercial  conditions  and  with  conspicuous 
success,  and  it  is  therefore  offered  as  a  preventive  measure 
which  is  free  from  many  drawbacks  which  are  the  frequent 
accompaniment  of  novel  ideas  and  operations.  Here  then  is  a 
simple  practical  summary  of  the  idea.  The  yellow  and  flesh,  or 
equivalent  colours,  are  printed  first,  so  that  they  will  dry  free 
from  gloss  or  tack.  The  fit  required  between  such  colours 
and  subsequent  printings  is  generally  a  matter  of  minor  im- 
portance, and  at  this  stage  distortion  of  the  paper,  whether 
it  be  by  stretching  or  contracting,  will  not  seriously  depreciate 
the  value  of  the  print  when  completed.  Eegister  between 
the  gold  and  an  outline  is  frequently  of  an  entirely  different 
character,  and  in  many  cases  the  slightest  variation  will  be 
readily  discernible,  and  have  a  decidedly  bad  effect  on  the 
finished  work.  Apart  from  this,  the  questions  which  decide 
or  control  the  colour  sequence  have  been  clearly  indicated 
previously. 

This  matter  may  be  one  of  convenience  also,  for  unless 
otherwise  predetermined  it  would  be  unwise  and  far  from 
economical  to  print  a  blue  before  a  yellow,  or  a  black  before  a 
red,  etc.  The  amount  of  cleaning  up  thereby  involved  would 
become  a  serious  and  distinctly  disagreeable  item,  and  purity 
of  tone  in  the  lighter  colours  would  be  conspicuous  by  its 
absence. 

The  matter  of  well  seasoned  printing  paper  has  been 
already  referred  to.  For  effective  colour  printing  the  paper 
must  also  possess  several  other  essential  qualities.  It  should 
be  firm  in  substance,  sufficiently  absorbent  to  carry  the 


LITHOGRAPHIC   COLOUR   PRINTING  51 

successive  layers  of  printing  ink,  as  far  as  possible  unstretch- 
able,  and  should  present  a  smooth  surface  though  not  a 
glazed  one.  The  chalky,  dull,  enamelled  papers  offer  many 
recognised  features  of  value  to  the  colour  printer.  They 
assist  in  the  absorption  of  the  ink  as  well  as  afford  a  suitable 
surface  for  their  impression.  Friction-glazed  and  other 
prepared  papers  are  also  excellent  for  colour  printing  by 
lithographic  methods. 


f   WNfV^s/TV 

., 


CHAPTER    X 

LITHOGRAPHIC  COLOUR  PRINTING — continued 

Printing  Inks — Varnish — Reducing  Medium — Relative  Values — Some 
useful  Hints— Bronze  Blue — Vermilion — Ink  Mixing — Ceramic 
Transfers — Colour  Transparencies. 

FOR  the  successful  manipulation  of  printing  inks  of  any 
description  it  will  be  necessary  to  know  something  of  their 
composition,  or  at  any  rate  of  such  features  as  render  them 
peculiarly  suitable  for  printing  purposes.  From  a  printer's 
point  of  view  the  most  important  of  these  features  is  what 
may  be  described  as  the  reducing  medium,  i.e.  the  medium 
which  holds  together  the  various  colours  so  as  to  produce 
pigments  of  suitable  working  consistency.  The  most  useful 
and  the  commonest  form  of  reducing  medium  is  a  linseed  oil 
product,  known  in  its  prepared  state  as  a  lithographic  varnish, 
with  a  supplementary  title  indicating  its  specific  character. 
Its  value  to  the  lithographic  printer  lies  mainly  in  the  fact 
that  when  it  is  fully  matured  it  possesses  a  good  full  body 
along  with  fair  drying  properties  and  freedom  from  any 
excess  of  greasy  matter.  This  varnish  is  used  in  three  or 
four  consistencies  between  which  any  degree  of  strength  may 
be  arranged  by  mixing.  A  brief  outline  of  the  manner  in 
which  they  are  prepared  may  still  further  emphasise  their 
usefulness  in  lithographic  printing. 

Eaw  linseed  oil  is  matured  and  oxidised  until  its  con- 
sistency is  considerably  reduced.     It  is  still  further  reduced 

by  being  boiled  at  a  high  temperature,  and  is  known  com- 

52 


LITHOGRAPHIC   COLOUR   PRINTING  53 

mercially  as  "  boiled  linseed  oil."  As  this  boiling  is  continued 
the  fumes  which  quickly  rise  can  be  ignited,  and  the  liquid 
soon  assumes  a  syrupy  or  stringy  character,  according  to  the 
length  of  time  during  which  it  is  subjected  to  the  action 
of  fire.  By  extending  or  discontinuing  the  burning  the 
varnish  is  produced  in  three  grades — thin,  medium,  or 
strong. 

Lithographic  varnish  is  a  good  servant  but  a  bad  master, 
and  it  is  a  generally  recognised  fact  that,  beyond  a  certain 
point,  lithographic  varnishes  as  a  reducing  medium  will 
depreciate  the  value  of  colour. 

The  chief  requisite  in  colour  printing  is  the  production  of 
a  solid  flat  impression,  and  for  this  purpose  almost  all  printing 
inks  must  be  reduced  to  a  suitable  working  consistency.  To 
accomplish  this,  and  at  the  same  time  retain  the  full  colour 
strength  of  printing  ink,  a  soft,  free-working  composition  will 
be  useful  and  desirable. 

There  are  several  commercial  varieties  of  solid  oil  from 
which  the  excess  of  grease  has  been  extracted.  These 
form  excellent  reducing  mediums.  They  break  down  the  tack 
of  stiff  pigments  and  enable  them  to  work  freely  during  the 
printing  operations.  The  drying  of  inks  thus  prepared  is  not 
seriously  retarded ;  they  lift  readily  and  usually  produce 
brilliant  impressions.  There  is  a  reasonable  and  logical 
explanation  of  these  peculiarities  which  is  both  interesting 
and  suggestive.  Whatever  the  character  of  a  reducing 
medium  may  be,  its  effect  on  the  strength  of  colour  will 
of  course  be  in  proportion  to  the  quantity  used.  In  all 
probability  1  oz.  of  a  solid  oil  composition,  otherwise  known  as 
lithographic  reducing  medium,  would  soften  down  a  quantity 
of  printing  ink  for  which  at  least  three  times  its  bulk  of 
varnish  would  be  required.  Consequently,  the  depth  of 
colour  and  covering  power  of  an  ink  reduced  with  "  litho 
medium  "  would  be  proportionately  greater  than  that  reduced 


54  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

with  varnish.  Vaseline  in  some  of  its  commercial  forms  is 
frequently  used  by  American  printers,  and  even  in  this 
country  its  use  is  being  tardily,  though  none  the  less  surely, 
recognised. 

A  few  remarks  anent  the  intelligent  application  of  a  soft- 
ening medium  may  not  be  inopportune.  Considerable  care  and 
judgment  must  always  be  exercised  or  there  will  be  a  loss  of 
cohesion  in  the  colour  pigments  which  cannot  fail  to  prove 
disastrous.  The  tendency  of  lithographic  varnish  is  to  bind 
the  colour  pigments  together,  and  this  should  not  be  entirely 
counteracted  by  the  addition  of  fatty  compositions,  lest  the 
printing  inks  run  "  scummy "  during  printing  operations, 
and  in  drying  leave  the  colouring  matter,  from  which  they 
have  been  detached,  on  the  surface  of  the  paper  in  the  form  of 
a  dry  powder. 

Such  lack  of  cohesion  may,  however,  be  an  inherent 
feature  of  the  ink  itself,  and  not  be  produced  in  the  manner 
just  indicated.  Bronze  blue  affords  a  striking  example  of  a 
printing  ink  of  this  character.  It  is,  in  fact,  a  "  constitutional 
weakness  "  which  cannot  apparently  be  prevented,  but  which 
is  fortunately  not  incurable.  The  addition  of  a  little  Canada 
balsam  to  bronze-blue  ink  will  add  considerably  to  its 
working  qualities.  The  loose  particles  of  the  pigment  appear 
to  be  held  together  without  becoming  harsh  or  stringy,  as 
might  easily  happen  if  varnish  of  sufficient  strength  was 
added  to  produce  the  same  effect. 

Other  colours,  again,  such  as  vermilion  and  yellow,  owing 
to  their  weight  and  texture,  will  always  require  a  fair 
percentage  of  varnish  in  their  composition.  At  the  same 
time,  a  little  reducing  medium  might  also  prove  beneficial. 
Eef erring  once  more  to  the  fact  that  vermilion,  as  distinguished 
from  its  imitation,  is  unusually  heavy,  etc.,  it  may  be  useful 
to  know  that  for  "  blocking  out "  work  it  has  no  equal  in  all 
the  range  of  printing  inks.  It  possesses  unrivalled  opacity, 


LITHOGRAPHIC   COLOUR   PRINTING  55 

and  as  a  "  blocking-out "  agent  frequently  plays  an  important 
part  in  colour  printing. 

Of  the  other  printing  inks,  few  possess  characteristics  of 
a  sufficiently  striking  character  to  require  special  mention. 
Their  working  qualities  present  no  exceptional  difficulties,  and 
their  employment  either  under  primary  or  secondary  condi- 
tions is  almost  invariably  determined  either  by  the  character 
of  the  work  or  some  such  conditions  as  have  been  already 
indicated. 

When  the  strength  of  a  colour  is  problematical,  or  its 
effect  more  or  less  a  question  of  experiment,  it  is  a  safe  plan 
to  mix  it  a  little  lighter  than  will  be  required.  For  obvious 
reasons  it  is  much  easier  to  alter  the  line  or  tone  of  a  light 
colour  than  that  of  a  darker  one. 

The  arrangements  for  extensive  and  economical  ink 
mixing  need  not  be  of  a  very  elaborate  character.  Standard 
colours  might  with  advantage  be  mixed  in  large  quantities 
and  kept  as  stock  shades.  Fleshes,  pink,  blues,  greys,  etc., 
are  all  useful  colours  which  are  in  constant  use.  A  warm  or 
cold  tone  could  be  imparted  to  a  stock  grey  as  required,  and 
a  similar  method  adopted  with  regard  to  the  other  colours. 
Other  peculiar  conditions  could  be  met  in  a  similar  manner, 
and  many  economies  thereby  effected. 

Although  the  foregoing  remarks  refer  mainly  to  litho- 
graphic colour  printing  generally,  they  may  with  equal  effect 
be  applied  to  many  of  its  more  specific  branches. 

Colour  printing  for  tin-plate  decoration  will  be  fully  dis- 
cussed in  a  subsequent  chapter. 

Transfer  printing  for  ceramic  decoration  presents  many 
features  in  common  with  transfer  printing  for  metal  decora- 
tion. Printing  colour  transparencies  is  a  commercial  phase  of 
colour  work  which  is  productive  of  many  curious  and  attractive 
effects.  Unlike  the  ordinary  colour  prints,  the  transparency 
is  intended  for  exhibition  both  by  reflected  and  transmitted 


$6  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

light.  The  paper  is  of  a  thin,  tough  quality,  and  the  first 
printing  is  usually  a  white  of  good  covering  power  and 
exceptional  opacity.  It  is  not  necessary  to  print  a  solid 
white  groundwork  for  the  coloured  design.  If  an  intense 
brilliant  colour  is  required  by  transmitted  light  the  omission 
of  part  of  the  white  printing  will  add  considerably  to  the 
effective  character  of .  the  design.  A  brilliancy  secured  in 
such  a  manner  may  be  still  further  intensified  by  printing  the 
colour  or  colours  in  register  on  both  sides  of  the  paper.  This 
can  be  easily  accomplished  by  first  allowing  the  cylinder 
covering  to  take  an  impression  from  the  stone,  and  then,  with 
the  sheet  laid  in  the  gripper,  make  a  second  impression  in  the 
usual  way  immediately  after. 

The  first  print,  which  might  be  termed  the  transfer,  will 
then  be  made  in  accurate  register  on  the  back  of  the  sheet. 

Semi-transparent,  or  even  transparent,  effects  can  be 
obtained  with  any  of  the  colours  by  an  omission  of  the  white 
printing  from  the  parts  affected.  Complete  opacity  may  be 
secured  by  its  introduction. 

This  print  is  afterwards  rendered  more  or  less  transparent 
by  coating  it  with  a  suitable  varnish. 


CHAPTER  XI 

SUBSTITUTES  FOR  LITHOGRAPHIC  STONES 

Metal    Plates  —  Preparation  —  Manipulation  —  Descriptive    Details  — 
Machine  Printing — The  Printing  Bed — Rotary  Printing  Machine. 

METAL  plate,  as  a  substitute  for  stone,  is  now  such  an  im- 
portant factor  in  lithography  that  the  printer  who  wishes  to 
consider  himself  thoroughly  efficient  must  possess  a  fairly 
comprehensive  and  practical  knowledge  of  its  manipulation 
and  possibilities. 

The  prejudice  which  has  hitherto  checked  the  progress  of 
this  branch  of  lithography  was  not  altogether  of  an  unreason- 
able character.  The  plates  themselves  were  far  from  reliable, 
and  the  difficulties  resulting  therefrom  were  a  fruitful  source 
of  trouble  and  expense. 

Metal,  as  a  printing  surface,  is  even  yet  a  comparatively 
new  factor  in  lithography,  and  the  majority  of  printers  have 
been  working  with  lithographic  stones  from  their  apprentice- 
ship till  the  present  time.  It  is  not  surprising,  therefore, 
that  in  relation  to  the  use  of  stones  almost  every  possible 
contingency  has  been  provided  for,  but  with  metal  plates  a 
little  fresh  knowledge  must  necessarily  be  acquired  before  the 
workman  can  claim  the  same  familiarity  of  manipulation 
which  he  may  feel  towards  the  parent  process.  This  is,  in 
fact,  the  point  upon  which  the  whole  question  usually  turns. 
Good  work  can  be  produced  from  zinc  and  aluminium  plates, 
— of  that  there  is  not  the  slightest  doubt, — and  it  is  equally 
certain  that  the  advantages  offered  by  their  use  are  of  a  sub- 

57 


58  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

stantially  practical  character.  They  can  be  handled  with 
ease  and  with  absolutely  no  fear  of  breaking.  They  are  much 
less  costly  than  stone,  and  require  less  storage  room. 

A  grain  of  a  finer  and  sharper  texture  can  be  imparted  to 
metal  than  is  the  case  with  stone,  and  what  is  even  of  greater 
importance,  the  character  of  such  a  grain  remains  unaffected 
for  a  considerable  time.  Surface  inequalities  are  rarely  met 
with  in  metal  printing  surfaces,  and  consequently  uniform 
pressure  is  to  a  certain  extent  guaranteed.  In  photo-litho- 
graphy it  is  possible  to  make  a  print  from  a  negative  direct 
on  to  the  plate  (Chap.  XVII.  page  100).  This  ensures  an 
original  of  exceptional  clearness  and  strength,  especially  in 
half-tone  subjects. 

Although  an  ordinary  zinc  plate,  which  has  been  carefully 
polished  to  free  it  from  every  trace  of  grease,  can  be  used  for 
lithographic  printing,  the  best  results  are  obtained  from  plates 
which  have  been  specially  prepared.  A  slight  de-polishing 
with  pumice  sand  and  a  piece  of  felt  may  impart  the  requisite 
"  tooth  "  to  the  face  of  the  plate,  or  the  following  method  may 
be  adopted : — Clean  the  plate  with  pumice  sand  and  felt,  and 
immediately  immerse  it  in  a  hot  bath  containing — 

18  oz.  Water.    . 
J  oz.  Alum. 
1  dram  Nitric  acid. 

Keep  this  liquid  in  constant  motion  over  the  face  of  the 
plate  until  it  assumes  an  even,  silvery -grey  appearance,  and 
then  wash  it  thoroughly  with  a  plentiful  supply  of  clean 
water.  Dry  at  once,  and  quickly. 

These  plates  can  also  be  sand-grained  by  specially  con- 
structed machinery,  or  a  variety  of  grains  and  stipple  can 
be  imparted  to  their  surface  by  etching  or  sand  blast. 

A  novel  yet  practical  idea,  which  has  met  with  consider- 
able success,  is  to  electrolytically  prepare  the  surface  of  the 
plates.  The  value  of  this  preparation  has  been  amply  demon- 


SUBSTITUTES   FOR   LITHOGRAPHIC  STONES       59 

strated  by  its  extensive  adoption  and  successful  use.  Another 
distinctly  progressive  feature  is  a  deposit  of  alumina  on  the 
zinc,  which  for  printing  purposes  gives  it  all  the  advantages 
of  an  aluminium  plate. 

Transfers   can   be   made  on   metal    plates    in  much   the 
same    manner    as    on  lithographic  stones.      For  press  work 


Plate-graining  machine,  showing  oscillating  motion. 

mount  the  plate  on  a  piece  of  cardboard  its  own  size,  then, 
having  gummed  a  sheet  of  brown  paper  on  the  face  of  the 
litho-stone,  place  the  mounted  plate  near  the  centre  and 
fasten  it  with  paste  or  gum.  This  will  prevent  it  moving 
about,  and  also  raise  it  sufficiently  from  the  stone  to  enable 
the  printer  to  use  his  damping-cloth  and  roller  freely. 


6o 


PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 


Before  mounting,  the  back  of  the  plate  should  be  carefully 
dusted  to  free  it  from  grit  and  dirt. 

After  the  drawing  or  transfer  has  been  made  cover  the 
surface  of  the  plate  with  strong  gum,  and  while  this  is  still 
wet  add  to  it  a  solution  of  bichromate  of  potash.  Leave  a 
slight  film  only  of  the  gum  bichromate,  and  then  dry  it 
quickly  and  thoroughly.  Wash  out  the  work  with  turpen- 


Plate-graining  machine,  showing  interior  of  trough. 

tine,  not  with  water.     The  gum,  being  insoluble  in  turpentine, 
remains  unaffected. 

Eoll  the  plate  up  solid  in  black  ink,  sponge  it  over  with 
water,  damp  it  with  a  cloth,  and  then  roll  it  up  in  the  usual 
way.  When  the  work  becomes  fully  charged  with  ink.  dust 
it  over  with  a  mixture  of  resin  and  French  chalk,  and  etch 
it  with  the  acid  etching  solution. 


SUBSTITUTES   FOR   LITHOGRAPHIC   STONES       61 

Every  maker  of  zinc  and  aluminium  plates  supplies  this 
special  etching  solution,  prepared  for  a  certain  quality  and 
character  of  metal.  It  is  advisable,  therefore,  to  use  the 
preparation  recommended,  and  thus  avoid  the  many  pitfalls 
which  beset  the  path  of  the  experimentalist. 

"  The  plate  is  now  well  washed  over  with  clean  water,  and 
thinly  gummed  up.  When  the  gum  is  dry  wash  out  the 
work  on  the  top  of  the  gum  with  dry  flannel  or  felt  till  all 
the  work  is  removed,  sprinkle  a  few  drops  of  water  on  the 
plate,  and  with  a  rubbing-up  rag  and  a  little  ink  and  turps 
rub  up  the  work  till  it  is  gently  charged  with  ink,  then  roll 
up  till  work  or  transfer  looks  strong  and  sharp,  when  the 
plate  is  ready  for  printing." 

For  etching  and  rolling  up  chalk  drawings  on  grained 
plates :  "  Pour  in  a  saucer  some  of  the  etching  solution,  and 
add  about  the  same  quantity  of  fresh,  strong  gum.  This 
solution  is  evenly  distributed  all  over  the  plate  with  a  camel- 
hair  brush,  and  left  to  dry.  Then  the  etching  is  removed 
with  water,  and  the  plate  very  thinly  gummed  up  and  left  to 
dry.  Now  the  work  is  washed  out  with  turps  and  a  piece 
of  dry,  soft  felt  or  flannel,  without  water,  till  all  the  work 
disappears,  and  the  plate  rolled  up  solid  black.  Then  sponge 
over  with  water-sponge,  damp  over  and  roll  up  till  work 
appears  nice  and  sharp.  Now  dust  over  with  resin  and 
French  chalk,  and  etch  again  with  the  etching  solution,  full 
strength.  After  the  etching  has  dried  remove  the  same 
with  water,  and  gum  up  again. 

"  When  drawings  are  to  be  washed  out  for  proofing  or 
printing,  the  plate  should  first  be  thinly  gummed  up.  This 
gum  layer  is  left  to  dry  thoroughly,  and  is  not  removed 
when  the  work  is  washed  out  (without  water)  with  turps 
and  a  dry  piece  of  flannel  or  felt.  Nextrwipe  away  all  the 
black  ink  and  turps,  still  using  no  water  for  this  operation. 
Should  any  black  work  be  left,  use  some  more  turps  on 


62  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

the  clean  dry  rag  till  all  the  work  has  been  removed,  then 
sprinkle  a  few  drops  of  water  on  the  plate,  and  use  a  clean 
rag  to  remove  the  gum  layer  and  loose  black  ink  left  on  the 
plate,  then  damp  over  as  usual  and  roll  up. 

"  Plates  treated  in  this  way  retain  the  grease  contained  in 
the  drawing,  and  the  work  rolls  up  easier  and  quicker,  and 
none  of  the  finer  work  gets  weakened  or  lost ;  also,  the  plate 
keeps  cleaner  and  free  from  scum. 

"When  alterations  are  necessary  the  work  should  be 
rolled  up  with  a  strong  black  ink,  and  dusted  over  with 
French  chalk  (powdered  talc).  Eemove  the  part  which 
requires  altering  with  a  mixture  of  equal  parts  etching 


FIG.  22. 

solution  and  turpentine  on  a  small  piece  of  felt  or  flannel, 
and  rinse  well  with  water.  Pour  some  special  re-preparing 
solution  in  a  saucer,  and  apply  this  solution  with  a  camel- 
hair  brush  to  the  parts  where  the  work  has  been  removed ; 
after  the  solution  has  remained  for  a  few  seconds  rinse 
well  with  water.  This  operation  is  to  be  repeated  several 
times  till  the  surface  looks  clean,  no  work  being  visible ; 
and  after  the  plate  is  dried  with  clean  white  blotting 
paper  it  is  ready  to  receive  the  additional  work.  When  the 
alteration  has  been  made,  the  rolling  up  should  be  done  with 
the  bichromate  solution,  as  per  general  directions. 

"  Where    the    alterations   involve   additional    work   only 
without    erasures    roll    up     the    design  first    with     a    good, 


SUBSTITUTES   FOR   LITHOGRAPHIC   STONES      65 

strong  ink,  and  dust  over  with  French  chalk.  The  special 
re-preparing  solution  is  used  in  the  same  manner  as  acetic 
or  citric  acid  is  employed  on  a  litho-stone.  For  this  purpose 
we  recommend  that  the  special  solution  should  be  diluted 
with  an  equal  quantity  of  clean  water,  and  the  solution 
applied  with  a  camel-hair  brush.  It  should  remain  on  for  a 
few  seconds,  and  then  be  quickly  rinsed  with  clean  water. 
This  operation  may  with  advantage  be  repeated  two  or  three 
times  for  securing  a  clean  surface  for  the  additional  work. 
When  the  plate  has  been  thoroughly  dried  with  clean 
blotting  paper  it  is  ready  to  receive  the  additional  work. 
The  rolling  up  should  be  done  with  the  bichromate  solution, 
as  per  general  directions." 

Machine  printing  from  zinc  or  aluminium  plates  requires 
but  a  slight  modification  of  well-known  methods ;  and  al- 
though it  may  in  some  respects  present  entirely  new  features, 
the  making  ready  of  work  in  which  several  printings  are 
employed  is  simplified,  and  consequently  much  time  is  saved. 
In  the  ordinary  type  of  litho-printing  machine  the  printing 
bed  (Fig.  22)  is  levelled  in  the  machine  for  the  first  printing, 
and,  if  this  is  carefully  arranged,  no  alteration  will  be  re- 
quired throughout  the  whole  9  series ;  for,  in  changing  from 
one  colour  to  another,  the  printing  plate  can  be  slipped  from 
the  bed  and  another  substituted  in  a  very  few  minutes.  The 
most  scrupulous  care  should  be  exercised  at  all  times  to  pre- 
vent dirt  or  grit  of  any  kind  insinuating  itself  between  the 
surface  of  the  printing  bed  and  the  back  of  the  plate. 

It  is  not  in  connection  with  the  flat-bed  printing  machine, 
however,  that  the  most  decided  progress  is  likely  to  be  made 
in  surface  printing  from  metal  plates.  "  The  change  which 
is  already  foreshadowed  in  the  printing  mechanism  of 
to-day  is  shown  by  the  growing  demand  for  the  rotary  in 
place  of  the  slow  and  tedious  movements  of  the  flat-bed 
press." 
5 


66 


PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 


The  mechanical  principle  of  the  rotary  machine  (Fig.  23) 
at  once  suggests  an  absolute  precision  of  movement  which  it 
is  scarcely  possible  to  guarantee  in  the  flat-bed  press.  There 
is  no  appreciable  lift  in  the  gearing  of  the  cylinders  when  the 
impression  is  made,  and  practically  no  risk  whatever  of 
slogger,  such  as  that  described  in  Chap.  VII.  page  38.  The 
uniform  velocity  of  the  cylinders,  which  is  to  a  great  extent 


IJCronfl^rtofyef-PUte     Kj    .  JZ  ' 
\  JT^n  floor  t,  &  */  4jk        fyt  •  «/  ' 


\  '* 1 


1 


«iUj-4£ 4  ,. 

M <f-4Z 

L /j-. 


«H 

n 


to 

FIG.  24. 


Hh—'*' ^ 


due  to  the  points  already  indicated,  considerably  reduces 
friction,  produces  perfect  registration,  and  enables  the  machine 
to  be  worked  at  a  high  rate  of  speed.  The  machine  shown 
on  page  63  presents  many  novel  and  essentially  practical 
features.  The  side  elevation  (Fig.  24)  gives  a  fairly  accurate 
idea  of  its  general  mechanical  principles. 


CHAPTER   XII 

TIN-PLATE  PRINTING 

Its  Evolution — Transfer  and  Direct  Transfer  Printing — The  Coated 
Paper — Reversed  Designs — Sequence  of  Printing — Printing  Inks — 
Purity  of  Tone — Drying. 

TIN-PLATE  printing  or  decoration  is  probably  the  most  re- 
markable development  of  modern  lithography.  From  a  most 
unpretentious  and  unpromising  beginning  its  evolution  has 
been  an  unbroken  record  of  phenomenal  progress.  Owing  to 
its  intrinsic  merits  and  peculiarly  assertive  character  it  has 
created  an  enormous  demand  for  its  own  productions. 

Difficulties  innumerable  were  encountered  and  surmounted, 
whilst  a  whole  host  of  trade  prejudices  had  to  be  removed 
before  anything  approaching  a  commercial  success  could  be 
claimed.  The  original  idea  was  to  transfer  a  printed  design 
from  a  suitably  prepared  paper  to  the  metal  plates  in  much 
the  same  manner  as  the  children  of  to-day  use  transfer  prints 
for  decorative  and  other  purposes.  Though  this  method  is 
now  to  some  extent  superseded,  it  is  by  no  means  obsolete. 
It  is  extensively  used  for  certain  classes  of  work,  and  so  long 
as  the  present  type  of  direct  tin-printing  machine  is  used  this 
transfer  method  of  metal  decoration  will  more  or  less  be 
retained. 

It  is  difficult,  and  in  some  cases  impossible,  to  print 
unusually  large  or  exceptionally  thick  metal  plates  by  the 
direct  process.  Hence  the  value  of  Transfer  Printing  as  a 
useful  auxiliary  process  which  can  be  resorted  to  without 

67 


68  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

the  expense  of  special  machinery.  The  ordinary  lithographic 
paper-printing  machine,  without  any  modification  whatever, 
will  fulfil  every  requirement. 

Almost  any  paper  which  has  been  coated  with  a  starchy 
composition  will  be  suitable  for  Transfer  Printing.  Though 
not  absolutely  essential,  it  is  decidedly  an  advantage  to  use 
a  paper  which  is  somewhat  porous,  not  too  hard.  A  brief 
description  of  the  principles  involved  will  probably  lead  to  a 
clearer  understanding  of  the  points  already  indicated. 

The  print  is  made  on  the  starchy  composition  with  which 
the  paper  is  coated,  and  never  actually  penetrates  to  the 
paper  itself.  This  composition,  being  readily  soluble  in 
water,  can  be  transferred  from  its  paper  base  to  any  other 
surface,  and  will  carry  with  it  any  print  or  impression 
previously  made  thereupon.  In  theory,  then,  this  process  is 
exceedingly  simple,  nor  is  it  likely  to  present  any  insuper- 
able difficulties  in  practice. 

One  of  the  most  important  features  of  Transfer  Printing, 
which  affects  not  only  the  colour  sequence  but  the  draughts- 
manship, is  the  inversion  of  the  design  when  printed.  To 
the  printer  who  is  accustomed  to  chromo  work  on  paper, 
this  matter  will  probably  offer  many  awkward  situations. 
The  control  over  colour  effects  is  somewhat  restricted,  and 
consequently  not  only  care  and  skill,  but  a  certain  amount 
of  special  training  and  actual  experience,  will  be  necessary 
for  the  production  of  really  successful  work.  In  theory  the 
outline  forme  should  be  printed  first,  but  in  practice  it  is 
frequently  advantageous  to  introduce  some  of  the  trans- 
parent tints  as  first  printings.  In  the  first  place,  such 
prints  rarely  affect  the  design  to  any  great  extent  as  far  as 
register  or  fit  is  concerned.  Consequently,  any  distortion  of 
the  paper  from  atmospheric  or  other  causes  has  no  very 
serious  consequences,  and  such  distortion,  i.e.  expansion  or  con- 
traction, would  be  most  likely  to  occur  during  the  initial 


TIN-PLATE   PRINTING  69 

printings.  There  is  yet  another  and  equally  important 
reason  for  this  suggested  modification  of  the  colour  sequence. 
The  light,  tacky  tints  considerably  improve  the  printing 
surface  offered  by  the  mucilaginous  coating  of  the  paper, 
and  the  stronger  inks  can  be  printed  on  it  with  a  full  body 
of  colour  yet  without  any  tendency  to  smash  and  smear.  The 
lighter  tints,  then,  are  printed  first,  and  these  are  followed 
by  the  opaque  colours,  reds  and  yellows  being  last.  The 
peculiar  feature  of  such  an  arrangement  is  that,  after  the 
first  few  printings,  the  design  becomes  partly  obscured,  and 
the  relative  value  of  different  colours,  together  with  the  effect 
of  their  super-position,  are  frequently  questions  of  skilful 
calculation  rather  than  visual  appreciation.  Thus  success- 
ful manipulation  is  therefore  more  or  less  the  result  of 
careful  observation  and  wide  experience.  In  certain  classes 
of  work  it  may,  of  course,  be  absolutely  essential  to  ascertain 
the  effects  of  colours  as  they  are  printed.  This  can  be  done 
by  transferring  a  progressive  print  to  a  sheet  of  dull  enamel 
surface  paper,  using  gum  water  as  a  transferring  medium. 
In  all  work  where  specific  colour  effects  are  required  it  will 
be  advisable  to  make  such  test  transfers  again  and  again  at 
different  stages  of  the  work. 

Concerning  the  printing  inks  themselves  but  little  need 
be  said.  They  must  be  of  good  quality,  varnishable,  and  of 
intense  colouring  power.  Purity  of  tone  is  requisite,  not 
only  under  ordinary  circumstances,  but  under  what-  may  be 
regarded  as  exceptional  conditions.  The  print,  when  subse- 
quently transferred  to  the  metal  plate,  will  be  placed  in  a  stove 
having  a  temperature  of  140°  Fahr.  Few  colours  remain 
quite  unaffected  by  this  stoving,  but  with  carefully  selected 
printing  inks  the  effect  is  scarcely  perceptible.  It  can, 
moreover,  usually  be  anticipated,  and  to  some  extent  mini- 
mised, either  by  judicious  super-position  or  skilful  preparation 
of  the  colours  themselves  before  printing.  The  following 


70  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

example  will  suggest  a  number  of  expedients  for  the  preser- 
vation of  tone  of  colour  in  tin-plate  decoration. 

Pale  blues  will  frequently  become  of  a  decidedly  greenish 
hue  when  varnished  or  stoved,  and  this  may  be  modified  by 
an  exaggerated  intensity  of  colour,  even  to  hardness,  when 
printing.  At  same  time,  it  must  be  remembered  that 
"  blues  "  are  seldom,  if  ever,  affected  in  tone.  Pinks  of  the 
lighter  shades,  on  the  other  hand,  may  suffer  both  in  hue 
and  tone.  "  Eeds "  may  be  mixed  with  a  more  liberal 
amount  of  "  lake "  than  they  apparently  need,  and  then 
backed  up  with  solid  masses  of  "  yellow "  and  "  flesh." 
These  will  restore  the  bright  vermilion  hue,  and  likewise  give 
a  greater  amount  of  density  or  covering  power  to  the  colour. 
Black,  in  the  same  manner,  may  be  intensified  by  an  under- 
lay of  blue.  As  far  as  purity  and  density  are  concerned, 
the  "  white "  printing  is  by  far  the  most  important.  The 
primary  function  of  this  printing  in  tin-plate  decoration  is  the 
formation  of  an  opaque  ground  on  the  metal  plate — equivalent 
to  the  white  paper.  Without  it  the  colours  of  a  design  would 
lose  their  brilliancy  and  effect,  for  their  purity  and  density  would 
be  affected  by  the  lustrous  sheen  of  the  bright  metal  plate. 

It  is  a  printing,  then,  of  some,  importance,  and  the  most 
scrupulous  care  should  be  exercised  during  its  manipulation. 
In  consequence  of  the  exceptional  density  required  it  is 
usual  to  repeat  the  "  white "  printing  either  two  or  three 
times.  The  first  printing  especially  should  be  made  with  a 
smooth,  well-mixed  ink,  which  should  be  worked  with  the 
intention  of  securing  a  perfectly  flat  and  solid  impression 
rather  than  a  heavy  body  of  colour.  The  requisite  amount 
of  density  can  be  obtained  by  the  second  or  third  impressions. 

A  slight  tinge  of  "  Oriental  blue  "  given  to  the  "  white  " 
will  improve  its  appearance  and  counteract  the  discoloration 
produced  by  the  varnishing  and  stoving. 

Another   point   with   which   the   average  printer   is   not 


TIN-PLATE   PRINTING  71 

familiar  is  the  unusually  rapid  drying  of  each  colour.  The 
printing  inks  must  dry  on  the  surface,  and  not  even  in  the 
slightest  degree  be  allowed  to  permeate  the  paper.  This  is, 
in  fact,  the  crux  of  the  whole  matter ;  and,  assuming  that 
the  coating  of  the  paper  is  suitable  and  perfect,  the  drying 
cannot  be  otherwise  than  on  the  surface.  Dryers,  pre- 
ferably liquid,  must  be  mixed  with  the  printing  inks  in 
liberal  quantities.  Here,  again,  experience  alone  can  be 
relied  upon  for  guidance.  Printing  inks  have  their  peculiar 
characteristics,  and  atmospheric  conditions  are  ever  varying. 
It  would  therefore  be  unwise  to  indicate  any  hard-and-fast 
lines  upon  which  to  work.  There  is  at  least  one  danger 
accompanying  the  use  of  dryers  in  any  form  which  must 
not  be  overlooked.  Colours  may  dry  too  hard  and  present 
for  the  succeeding  printings  a  surface  similar  to  a  varnished 
sheet,  which  will  offer  no  grip  to  the  printing  ink,  and  upon 
which  it  will  probably  run,  and,  consequently,  produce  a 
defective  impression.  This  is  by  no  means  an  infrequent 
occurrence.  Experience  alone  can  prevent  it,  but  the 
remedy  is  as  simple  as  it  is  effective.  Briskly  rub  each 
printed  sheet  with  a  pad  of  soft  rag  and  a  little  magnesia 
or  French  chalk.  Magnesia  is  best.  It  is  an  almost  im- 
palpable powder,  and  has  no  ill  effect  even  upon  the  most 
delicate  tints.  This  rubbing  will  produce  a  slightly  matt 
surface  on  the  hard  glossy  ink,  and  on  this  a  good  solid 
impression  may  be  made  without  further  trouble. 

The  printed  sheets  should  be  exposed  to  the  air  for  a 
few  hours  to  accelerate  drying.  This  may  be  done  in  any 
convenient  manner,  either  by  laying  them  out  in  frames  or 
hanging  them  up.  A  "  set  off "  in  Transfer  Printing  should 
be  sedulously  avoided ;  not  that  the  soiling  of  the  back  of 
a  sheet  is  of  any  moment,  but  because  the  matter  set  off 
on  the  back  of  one  sheet  must  be  pulled  off  the  face  of 
another,  and  that  very  often  in  liberal  proportions. 


CHAPTER  XIII 

TIN-PLATE  PRINTING — continued 

Direct  Tin  Printing  —  The  Machine  —  Peculiarities  of  Impression  — 
Cylinder  Covering  —  Colour  Sequence  —  Printing  Inks  —  Drying 
Racks — Air  Drying  and  Stoving. 

"  DIRECT  tin  printing "  is  not,  as  the  term  might  suggest,  a 
direct  impression  of  the  printing  forme  on  the  metal  plate. 
It  is  in  reality  a  transfer  printing  process  in  which  the 
transferring  medium  is  a  cylinder  with  an  elastic  covering. 
This  additional  cylinder  is  one  of  the  chief  characteristics  of 
a  direct  tin-printing  machine,  and,  apart  from  a  few  accessory 
movements,  it  is  in  this  respect  alone  that  it  differs  from  an 
ordinary  lithographic  printing  machine.  Fig.  25  gives  a 
sufficiently  clear  idea  of  this  distinguishing  feature.  A 
detailed  description  of  its  mechanical  principles  is  unnecessary, 
but  the  following  points  will  prove  helpful. 

The  impression  is  made  from  the  printing  forme  upon 
the  lower  cylinder  during  the  first  half  of  its  revolution,  and 
transferred  to  the  metal  plate,  which  is  carried  by  the  upper 
cylinder  as  the  revolution  is  completed.  The  reciprocal 
movement  of  these  two  cylinders  is  therefore  a  matter  which 
demands  the  keenest  possible  attention.  Their  pitch  must 
be  absolutely  accurate,  the  pressure  of  one  against  the  other 
nicely  adjusted,  and  the  brake  arrangement  on  both  such  as 
to  ensure  a  perfectly  steady  revolution. 

The  lower  cylinder  is  covered  with  a  three-ply  rubber 
blanket,  which  provides  a  sufficiently  elastic  impression  surface. 


72 


TIN-PLATE   PRINTING  75 

This  rubber  covering  is  a  most  important  feature,  and 
requires  both  careful  adjustment  and  intelligent  use.  Careful 
adjustment  is  requisite  to  ensure  the  tension  being  perfectly 
uniform  over  the  whole  surface,  when  the  material  is  drawn 
taut  by  means  of  a  tooth-and-ratchet  arrangement.  Were  it 
not  so,  the  printing  surface  presented  would  naturally  vary  in 
thickness  and  resilience,  in  consequence  of  which  the  pressure 
would  be  variable  and  the  impression  distorted. 

A  most  remarkable  peculiarity  of  this  rubber  covering  is 
that  it  has  a  very  decided  influence  upon  the  size  of  the 
impression.  If,  for  example,  its  pressure  upon  the  printing 
forme  is  increased,  the  impression  will  be  slightly  less 
than  the  work  on  the  stone,  whilst  a  lighter  pressure  will 
of  course  produce  the  opposite  effect.  It  is  advisable,  there- 
fore, when  making  a  first  impression,  to  measure  it  from  back 
to  front  and  compare  it  with  the  printing  forme.  This 
method  will  ensure  a  print  of  the  exact  size,  and  avoid  any 
risk  of  complications  in  the  subsequent  printings.  Such  dis- 
tortion— for  a  distortion  it  really  is — may  frequently  be  turned 
to  good  account,  and  under  certain  conditions  it  may  prove  to 
be  a  help  rather  than  a  hindrance.  Some  slight  inaccuracy 
in  the  fitting  of  any  part  of  the  design  may  occasionally  be 
corrected  by  inserting  patches  of  thin  paper  under  the 
cylinder  covering,  so  as  to  almost  imperceptibly  increase  the 
pressure  over  the  required  area.  This  idea  in  its  application 
to  "making  ready"  at  a  tin-printing  machine  will  suggest 
many  possibilities  to  the  resourceful  printer,  and  if  intelligently 
treated  will  rarely  prove  troublesome.  In  a  lesser  degree  the 
same  system  of  packing  may  be  applied  to  the  upper  cylinder, 
and  the  size  of  the  impression  to  some  extent  controlled 
during  its  transference  to  the  metal  plate.  The  speed  of  the 
machine  also  affects  the  impression,  and  in  a  somewhat 
peculiar  manner.  Several  theories  have  been  set  forth  to 
prove  why  an  increase  in  speed  should  produce  a  slight 


76  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

enlargement  of  the  impression,  and  vice  versd ;  but  it  is 
doubtful  if  any  of  them  are  altogether  satisfactory.  Most 
probably  it  is  due  to  a  momentary  change  in  the  resilience  of 
the  rubber.  The  character  of  the  pressure,  which  is  certainly 
influenced  by  increasing  or  diminishing  the  speed,  would  of 
course  effect  such  a  change.  The  effect,  as  just  indicated,  is, 
however,  only  perceptible  when  a  very  pronounced  variation 
in  the  speed  takes  place.  A  rubber  blanket  is  also  affected  in 
a  somewhat  similar  manner  by  atmospheric  changes,  though 
not  appreciably  by  moisture. 

One  other  point  in  connection  with  the  cylinder  covering 
is  worth  noting.  Whenever  it  is  necessary  to  remove  the 
impression  from  the  blanket, — and  the  necessity  may  arise 
many  times  during  the  course  of  a  day's  run, — let  it  be 
done  with  turpentine  or  benzole,  and  as  rapidly  as  possible. 
After  the  superfluous  turpentine  or  other  cleanser  has  been 
wiped  off,  dust  over  the  blanket  with  French  chalk.  This 
will  completely  absorb-  any  of  the  cleanser  which  may  have 
permeated  the  rubber,  and  thus  minimise  any  injurious  effect. 

Unlike  the  Transfer  Process  in  Direct  Printing,  the  colour 
sequence  is  practically  the  same  as  for  paper  printing. 
There  are,  of  course,  essential  points,  of  difference,  and  these 
may  fitly  mark  the  next  stage  of  progress  in  the  discussion  of 
this  subject.  In  the  first  place,  a  bright  metal  plate  does  not 
present  an  altogether  suitable  printing  surface,  and  for  several 
reasons.  The  sheen  of  such  a  plate  will  show  through  many 
of  the  printed  colours  with  a  dull  metallic  lustre.  The 
surface,  again,  is  hard  and  excessively  smooth,  or,  as  it 
is  sometimes  expressively  described,  without  tooth.  As  can 
easily  be  seen,  this  is  far  from  an  ideal  printing  surface. 

White  also  plays  a  prominent  and  effective  part  in  many 
designs,  and  is  frequently  indispensable.  Its  presence, 
when  necessary  in  Direct  Tin  Printing,  must  therefore  be 
arranged  for  in  some  form  or  other.  One  white  printing  is 


TIN-PLATE   PRINTING  77 

seldom  sufficient  to  produce  a  perfectly  clean  and  solid 
ground.  Two  printings,  or  even  three,  may  be  necessary. 
Purity  of  tone  is  a  most  important  point,  and  therefore 
a  pigment  should  be  chosen  which  will,  not  only  remain 
unchanged  by  its  contact  with  the  metal,  but  which  will  be 
unaffected  by  the  heat  applied  during  stoving.  The  appear- 
ance of  this  white  may  be  improved  by  the  addition  of  blue, 
as  in  Transfer  Printing  (p.  70),  and  here  also  the  smallest 
possible  quantity  will  be  sufficient. 

Gold  Lacquer  Printing  is  peculiar  to  Tin-plate  Decoration, 
and  its  advent  indicated  a  vast  progress  in  artistic  display 
and  effect. 

Printing  lacquer  is  a  transparent  pigment  of  about  the 
same  consistency  and  character  as  printing  ink.  It  is  usually 
prepared  in  three  shades  of  colour — red,  citron  or  orange, 
and  pale  gold.  A  combination  of  these  in  suitable  propor- 
tions will  produce  almost  any  strength  or  shade  of  gold 
which  may  be  required.  Except  as  regards  their  unusually 
brilliant  transparency,  these  lacquers  much  resemble  yellow 
lakes,  and  in  paper  printing  might  even  be  used  as  economical 
substitutes  for  the  more  expensive  pigments.  This,  however, 
is  only  a  suggestion,  and  has  little  if  any  practical  bearing 
upon  their  application  to  Tin-plate  Printing,  where  they 
completely  transform  the  bright  sheen  of  the  highly  polished 
metal  plate  into  a  brilliant  and  most  effective  gold.  Gold 
lacquer  is  an  exceptional  pigment  in  many  respects.  It 
works  exceedingly  well,  and  gives  a  sharp,  flat  impression 
where  most  other  pigments  would  fail.  It  also  has  the 
power  of  conveying  many  of  its  own  good  qualities  to  any 
printing  ink  with  which  it  may  be  incorporated. 

In  Transfer  Printing  the  question  of  rapid  drying  is  very 
important,  and  in  Direct  Tin  Printing  it  is  even  more  so. 
Arrangements  of  a  somewhat  extensive  character  must  be 
made  for  the  reception  of  metal  plates  immediately  after 


PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 


printing,  so  that  the  air  may  freely  circulate  about  them,  and 
thus  assist  in  the  drying.     The  room  in  which  the  printing 

sheets  are   thus  stored 

must  be  free  from  dust, 

for  it  will  readily  adhere 
to  the  tacky  printing 
ink,  and  afterwards 
prove  a  source  of  end- 
less trouble. 

Drying     racks     of 
_^^    various  descriptions  are 
used  for  the  storage  of 
printed     metal    plates. 
One  of  the  best  is  con- 

FIG.  26.  structed    on    the    lines 

shown  in  Fig.  26.     The 

shelves  A  A  are  adjustable  so  as  to  carry  plates  of  different 
sizes.  The  printed  sheets  are  set  up  on  end  in  the  grooves 
B  B,  and  by  arranging 
them  back  to  back  in 
pairs  a  large  number  can 
be  accommodated  with- 
out hindering  the  drying. 
Other  types  of  drying 
racks  are  shown  in  the 
sectional  drawings  (Figs. 
27A  and  27s). 

The  question  of  air- 
drying  versus  stoving  has 
ever  been  a  contentious 
one,  and  admits  of  con- 
siderable diversity  of 
opinion.  Air-drying  is  preferable  where  convenient. 


FIG.  27A. 


It  is 


much  more  economical  than  stoving,  of  course  ;  but,  on  the 


TIN-PLATE   PRINTING 


79 


§ 


§ 


FIG.  27B. 


other  hand,  it  might  be  a  better  plan  to  stove  a  printing  than 

to  wait,  perhaps  for  some  hours,  until  it  dried  naturally.    With 

some    printing    inks   and    under   certain 

climatic  conditions  both  may  be  necessary, 

so  it  is  almost  impossible  to  lay  down  any 

hard-and-fast  rules  as  to  the  adoption  of 

either  plan. 

Some  knowledge  of  their  respective 

disadvantage  should  be  acquired,  however, 

in  order  to  avoid,  or  at  least  minimise, 

them. 

Take,  for  instance,  a  course  of  eight 

printings,  each  one  absolutely  necessary 

to  the  design,  and  each  one  to  be  dried 

by  stoving.      It   is    only   reasonable    to 

suppose  that  the  first  and  second  printings 

will  be  seriously  affected  by  the  subsequent  stovings.     They 

will  undoubtedly  harden  to  such  an  extent  as  to  render  the 

super -position  of  other  colours  a  difficult  matter,  and  their 

purity  of  tone  will  most  probably 
be  affected.  According  to  the 
same  line  of  reasoning,  some  sheets 
would  be  more  affected  by  the  heat 
than  others,  owing  to  their  position 
in  the  racks,  the  heat  of  stoves 
being  greatest  near  the  top. 

FIG.  28.-Convenient  method  of         Air-drying  can  only  be  accom- 
stacking   decorated    metal  plished  by  adding  to  the  printing 

plates   to    distribute    their    ink    ft    proportion    of    some    guitable 
weights  and  prevent  injury. 

drier.    (See  Transfer  Printing,  p.  71.) 

Naturally,  it  requires  a  much  longer  time,  but  it  is  equally 
effective,  much  less  troublesome,  and  generally  more  satis- 
factory. 


CHAPTER   XIV 

TIN-PLATE  DECORATION 

Suitable  Designs  —  A  Variety  of  Effects  —  Gold  Lacquer  —  Super- 
position of  Colours  —  Embossed  Effects  —  Embossing  Plates  — 
Lacquers. 

IT  is  usually  and  rightly  supposed  that  the  most  effective 
results  in  Tin-plate  Decoration  are  produced  from  designs 
which  are  lithographed  for  that  specific  purpose. 

Designs  which  are  specially  arranged  for  Paper  Printing 
can  be  used  so  long  as  the  effect  produced  by  the  trans- 
position from  right  to  left  does  not  affect  its  application,  or 
render  the  same  impossible.  This,  of  course,  applies  more 
particularly  to  designs  in  which  lettering  appears,  but  at  the 
same  time  it  may  affect  designs  of  an  essentially  pictorial 
character  in  an  equally  important  manner ;  for  it  must  be 
remembered  that  a  drawing  for  Tin-plate  Printing  must  appear 
on  the  lithographic  stone  exactly  as  it  is  impressed  on  the 
metal,  and  not,  as  in  Paper  Printing,  reversed  from  right  to 
left.  This  naturally  simplifies  the  drawing  on  stone,  and  to 
some  extent  enables  the  draughtsman  to  dispense  with  the 
reversing  mirror  when  copying. 

The  primary  object  of  this  short  chapter  will  be  to  point 
out  some  of  the  characteristic  features  of  Tin-plate  Decora- 
tion, so  that  such  methods  as  are  usually  adopted  by  the 
artist  and  the  printer  may  be  modified  or  amplified  to  meet 
any  peculiar  requirements  of  work  in  hand. 

A   greater   variety   of    effects    can    be    attained    on    the 


TIN-PLATE   DECORATION  81 

polished   metal  plate   than   it  is  at  all  possible  to  produce 
on  paper. 

A  gold  effect,  the  result  of  lacquer  printing,  is  especially 
striking.  In  a  similar  manner  an  excellent  translucent  lustre" 
can  be  imparted  to  almost  any  colour  by  taking  away  the 
white  opaque  ground,  and  thereby  producing  a  peculiar  semi- 
transparency  which  is  both  pleasing  and  effective.  Lacquer 
printed  over  white  produces  a  luff  colour,  which  can  be  used 
as  a  second  yellow  or  to  form  the  base  of  a  flesh.  The  colour 
of  the  lacquer  is  softer  and  less  obtrusive  when  printed  under 
instead  of  above  the  white.  The  super-position  of  colour 
generally,  as  described  in  Chap.  XII.  page  70,  is  peculiar  to 
tin-plate  printing,  and  suggests  the  advisability,  if  not  the 
necessity,  of  a  special  design.  The  advantages  of  such  super- 
position are  obvious  and  substantial.  Under  ordinary  com- 
mercial conditions  it  is  almost  impossible  in  tin  printing  to 
obtain  the  same  intensity  of  tones  in  the  printed  colours  as  in 
paper  printing.  Some  such  strengthener  as  the  super-position 
of  suitable  colours  is  therefore  necessary.  The  work  of  the 
lithographic  draughtsman  is  in  this  respect  of  a  somewhat 
unusual  character ;  but  a  little  intelligent  consideration  will 
render  its  execution  on  these  lines  comparatively  easy  and 
satisfactory. 

As  already  stated,  yellows  can  be  accentuated  by  a 
super-position  of  lacquer,  and  in  the  same  manner  blues  and 
greys  add  intensity  to  black.  Eed  can  be  strengthened  by  a 
foundation  of  lacquer,  also  flesh  and  yellow,  either  singly  or 
in  combination.  The  drawing  of  lacquer  and  white  formes 
should  receive  the  most  careful  attention.  They  should  fit 
each  other  accurately,  even  to  the  most  minute  details ;  for 
the  slightest  overlapping  will  be  revealed  by  the  presence  of 
a  very  assertive  buff  colour,  while  any  deficiency  in  combina- 
tion will  leave  a  not  less  striking  margin  of  bright  tin 
exposed. 
6 


82  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

In  some  instances  it  might  be  an  advantage  to  transfer 
one  forme  from  Hack  to  white  to  produce  the  opposite  colour, 
and  thus  ensure  perfect  register. 

In  decorative  designs  particularly,  tin-plate  printing 
suggests  almost  unlimited  possibilities  for  brilliant  effects, 
and  in  this  respect  it  offers  fair  latitude  for  individual  origin- 
ality and  manipulative  skill.  In  the  production  of  show 
tablets  especially,  considerable  attention  has  been  given  to 
embossing,  in  order  to  suggest  and  represent  relief.  Though 
not  actually  produced  by  the  artist,  this  is  in  effect  part  of 
the  scheme  or  plan  of  his  design,  and  will  consequently  in- 
fluence his  work  to  some  extent.  For  simple  ornamentation 
only,  metal  embossing  presents  little  that  is  new  or  novel ; 
but  for  the  production  of  relief  effects  in  the  pictorial 
elements  of  a  design  its  application  becomes  a  more  important 
and  influential  matter.  By  its  aid  a  flat  and  otherwise 
uninteresting  subject  can  be  made  attractive  and  vigorous, 
and  for  general  purposes  of  effective  display  its  value  will  be 
considerably  enhanced  and  its  assertive  character  emphasised. 

Without  entering  too  minutely  into  matters  which  affect 
the  lithographic  printer  in  an  indirect  fashion  only,  it  will 
yet  be  useful  to  him  to  know  how  an  embossing  die  is 
produced  which  registers  accurately  with  the  design  to  be 
operated  on.  A  black  impression  of  the  outline  forme  of  the 
design  is  made  on  transfer  paper  similar  to  that  described 
in  Chap.  XII.  page  68,  and  re-transferred,  by  pressure  only,  to 
another  sheet  of  the  same  paper.  The  re-transfer  is  to  be 
the  impression  required,  and  this  in  its  turn  is  re-transferred 
again  to  a  prepared  brass  plate.  The  only  preparation 
necessary  is  the  levelling  and  planing  of  the  plate,  and,  if 
desired,  it  can  be  coated  with  a  thin  layer  of  white  paint 
or  enamel.  This  white  ground  makes  the  work  easier,  by 
rendering  the  impression  more  distinct.  With  such  a  guide  as 
this  the  cutting  or  engraving  is  a  comparatively  simple  matter. 


TIN-PLATE   DECORATION  83 

The  engraved  plate  is  placed  in  a  casting  box,  and  a 
stereo-metal  casting  is  made  from  it.  A  little  trimming  may 
be  necessary  for  the  completion  of  these  two  tools,  and  they 
will  require  to  be  suitably  mounted,  so  that  they  may  be 
accurately  adjusted  in  the  embossing  press. 

Metal  embossing  has  certain  limitations  which  must  be 
recognised  as  an  essential  condition  of  its  effective  application. 

The  plates  vary  considerably  in  texture  and  temper, 
and  the  depth  and  character  of  relief  will,  to  some  extent 
at  least,  be  controlled  by  the  quality  of  the  metal.  Sharp 
lines  and  abrupt  terminations  impose  a  strain  under  which 
many  plates  split,  therefore  such  features  ought  to  be 
avoided.  Easy,  rounded  lines,  rather  than  those  of  the 
straight  furrow  description,  produce  the  best  results  and  give 
least  trouble  during  operations.  Where  abrupt  terminations 
are  quite  unavoidable  the  design  should,  if  possible,  be  so 
arranged  as  to  evade  the  super-position  of  colour  over  these 
parts. 

Lacquer,  if  properly  mixed  and  applied,  is  probably  the 
toughest  pigment  used  by  the  tin  printer,  and  is  generally 
suitable  for  embossed  work.  It  prints  an  exceedingly  thin 
layer  or  film  on  the  face  of  the  metal,  which  under  average 
conditions  rarely  interferes  with  the  working  of  the  embossing 
tool. 


CHAPTER  XV 

PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHY 

Early  Experiments — An  Analysis — The  Direct  Process — Transfer  Process 
— Line  and  Half-tone — Some  Difficulties — A  Natural  Grain — Ink 
Photo-screen  Effects — Essential  Features. 

ONE  of  the  most  promising  features  of  lithography  is  its 
co-partnership  with  photography  as  a  rapid  and  accurate 
method  of  reproduction.  The  resources  offered  by  this  com- 
bination are  very  extensive.  For  facsimile  copying  and 
proportionate  enlargement  or  reduction  photography  stands 
unrivalled,  and,  although  in  certain  phases  it  may  be 
somewhat  mechanical  in  its  effects,  its  relation  to  litho- 
graphy as  a  reproductive  art  is  nevertheless  of  an  intensely 
practical  nature,  and  far  from  inartistic  in  character. 

The  first  idea  of  inking  up  a  photographic  print  so  that 
it  might  be  transferred  to  the  lithographic  stone  was  suggested 
in  the  simplest  possible  manner.  A  brief  account  of  its 
inception  will  be  instructive  as  well  as  interesting,  inasmuch 
as  it  will  lead  to  a  clearer  conception  of  the  elementary 
principles  involved. 

During  the  early  experiments  in  carbon  printing  it  was 
discovered  that  a  gelatinous  film  sensitised  with  certain 
bichromates  could  be  charged  with  a  coloured  pigment,  and  a 
picture  developed  thereon.  At  first  it  was  not  realised  that 
images  produced  by  the  action  of  the  light  on  such  a  surface 
could  be  inked  up  with  a  greasy  composition  and  afterwards 
transferred  to  the  lithographic  stone,  but  it  was  not  long 

84 


PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHY  85 

before  this  important  point  became  apparent.  It  was  found 
that  after  exposure  under  the  negative  the  transfer  ink  would 
only  adhere  to  such  portions  of  the  gelatinous  surface  as  had 
been  acted  upon  by  the  light. 

Photo-lithography  will  best  be  considered  under  two 
sections,  namely— 

1.  The  direct  process,  in  which  the  actual  printing  surface 
is  prepared  and  exposed  under  the  negative. 

2.  The  transfer  process,  in  which  a  gelatine- coated  paper 
is  sensitised  in  a  solution  of  bichromate  of  potassium  and  the 
photographic  print  made  upon  it. 

The  direct  process  in  its  application  to  the  lithographic 
stone  is  uncertain  in  its  results.  It  is  impossible  to  secure 
sufficiently  close  contact  between  the  negative  and  the  stone, 
particularly  when  large  surfaces  are  under  operation,  and 
consequently  the  print  is  rarely  if  ever  an  unqualified  success. 
The  erasure  of  defective  wTork  is  also  a  serious  matter,  and  can 
only  be  effected  by  polishing  and  preparing  the  stone  again. 

In  the  transfer  process  absolutely  close  contact  can  be 
assured  by  the  use  of  the  transfer  paper ;  and  should  the 
print  from  any  cause  whatever  prove  defective,  another  can  be 
made  immediately  without  any  serious  loss  of  time  or  material. 

The  successful  application  of  the  direct  process  to  zinc  and 
aluminium  plates  is,  however,  an  accomplished  fact.  The  metal 
plate  is  sufficiently  elastic  to  adapt  itself  to  any  inequalities 
on  the  surface  of  the  negative.  Under  such  conditions  as 
these  this  process  offers  at  least  one  very  important  advantage. 
There  is  not  the  slightest  possibility  of  distortion  such  as 
might  occur  in  the  development  of  a  transfer.  The  metal 
plate  also  lends  itself  to  easy  manipulation. 

Photo-lithography  in  line  is  simply  the  reproduction  of 
line  drawings  or  prints  in  which  the  design  is  represented 
in  black  and  white  with  only  such  gradations  as  may  be 
suggested  by  lines  or  dots. 


86  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

Half-tone  photo  -  lithography  is  the  reproduction  of  a 
design  or  copy  which  has  in  its  composition  gradations  of 
tone  in  the  form  of  flat  tints. 

It  is  sometimes  described  as  the  translation  of  the 
graduated  light  and  shade  of  the  original  copy  into  a  surface 
which  can  be  printed  from  by  mechanical  means,  for  which 
purpose  the  ink-bearing  surface  is  broken  up  into  the  most 
minute  sections,  and  thus  forming  an  almost  imperceptible  grain. 
The  first  attempts  to  reproduce  the  half-tones  of  a  copy,  in 
the  form  of  a  grain  consisting  of  minute  dots  of  varying  size 
and  contiguity  according  to  the  gradation  of  tone  required, 
were  made  with  a  screen  of  open  textile  fabric.  This  screen 
was  placed  between  the  lens  and  the  sensitive  plate,  but  the 
results  were  crude  and  unsatisfactory. 

The  invention  of  cross-lined  screens,  in  which  the  lines 
were  cut  on  glass  and  filled  with  black  or  other  suitable 
colouring  matter,  was  a  decided  advancement  in  the  half-tone 
photo  processes. 

The  "  screeny "  effect  produced  by  the  "  unvarying  uni- 
formity of  grain"  in  half-tone  work  is  undoubtedly  the  chief 
drawback  to  its  more  extensive  adoption  for  photo-lithography. 
Fine  etching  cannot  be  resorted  to  as  in  photo-engraving, 
neither  is  it  possible  to  emphasise  effects  by  skilful  overlay 
and  underlay ;  consequently  half-tone  impressions  from  a 
lithographic  stone  are  frequently  disappointing.  There  are 
no  insurmountable  obstacles  to  hinder  the  production  of 
excellent  transfers,  nor  is  it  a  difficult  matter  to  transfer 
them  to  stone.  The  trouble  is,  as  already  pointed  out,  the 
unvarying  uniformity  of  the  grain. 

This  effect,  or  rather  this  lack  of  effect,  has  been  to  some 
extent  overcome  by  the  use  of  a  "  four-line  "  screen  in  lieu  of 
the  usual  "  crossed  "  screen,  but  even  this  is  merely  a  remedy 
and  not  a  cure. 

It  has  been  confidently  asserted  that  the  highest  degree 


<^r  THE 

• 


PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHY 

of  excellence  in  photo-process  work  will  be  attained  by  the 
adoption  of  what  may  be  termed  a  natural  grain.  Several 
processes  have  been  introduced  which  are  undoubtedly  based 
upon  collotype  methods  in  which  a  reticulated  grain  is 
produced  more  or  less  suitable  for  lithographic  printing. 
Unlike  the  mechanical  screen  grain  the  texture  of  these 
processes  reproduces  the  original  copy  with  but  little,  if 
any,  loss  of  expressive  power.  This  is  indeed  a  feature 
of  considerable  importance,  and  suggests  many  possibilities 
in  the  way  of  artistic  reproduction. 

To  reproduce  an  old  chalk  drawing  so  that  it  might 
be  successfully  transferred  to  stone  and  printed  in  the 
usual  way,  would  be  practically  impossible  by  any  other 
process.  In  copying  through  a  ruled  screen  many  of  the 
delicate  contrasts  of  light  and  shade  would  be  so  reduced 
as  to  become  almost  valueless,  consequently  the  print  loses 
both  in  artistic  and  expressive  power.  In  contradistinction 
to  this  a  natural  grain  exhibits  no  harshness  or  indistinctness 
in  the  gradations  of  tone,  and  retains  its  clearness  and  sharp- 
ness throughout  the  printing  operation. 

Eeverting  again  to  the  half-tone  ruled  screens,  it  may  be 
well  to  state  that  small  prints,  being  usually  subjected  to  a 
closer  inspection  than  large  ones,  must  be  reproduced  with  great 
attention  to  the  finer  details  to  ensure  a  certain  amount  of 
fidelity,  and  for  this  reason  a  screen  with  fine  rulings  must 
be  employed.  Naturally,  stronger  and  more  vigorous  repro- 
duction can  be  secured  with  the  coarser  rulings,  but  the  screen 
effect  will  be  too  pronounced  for  close  scrutiny. 

There  is  still  much  to  achieve  in  photo-lithography,  and 
it  is  probably  owing  to  a  full  recognition  of  this  fact  that  the 
progressive  character  of  the  process  is  maintained.  Its  com- 
mercial value  is  undoubted,  and  its  successful  application  is 
chiefly  a  question  of  how  and  where  it  can  be  most  effectively 
introduced. 


88  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

The  essential  features  of  photo-lithography  are : — 

1.  A   copy  or  original  in  which  the  modelling  is  well 
defined,  and  the  light  and  shade  well  emphasised,  even  to  a 
point  of  slight  exaggeration. 

2.  A  negative  in  which  the  whites  of  the  original  appear 
opaque,  with  clear  glass  to  represent  the  lines  and  solids. 

3.  A  print  which  can  be  developed  or  inked  up  with  a 
pigment  sufficiently  greasy  in  nature  to  transfer  to  the  litho- 
graphic stone. 


CHAPTEE   XVT 

PHOTO  -LITHOGRAPHY — continued 

The    Copy— Gradations    of    Tone — Scraper    Boards — Description    and 
Effect — Shading  Mediums — Crayon  Drawings — Half-tone  Copy. 

IT  has  already  been  pointed  out  that  well-defined  modelling  is 
most  desirable  in  the  original  copy.  To  secure  this  a  con- 
siderable degree  of  artistic  perception  and  discretion,  as  well 
as  manipulative  skill,  is  requisite.  In  photo-process  work 
it  is  almost  impossible  to  produce  artistic  effects  from  an 
indifferent  or  unsuitable  copy. 

Pen-and-ink  sketches  and  wash  drawings  are  entirely 
under  the  control  of  the  artist,  and  characteristic  effects 
are  chiefly  due  to  bold  and  vigorous  conception  and  skilful 
drawing.  Few  photographs  are  suitable  for  photo-mechanical 
reproduction  without  some  previous  preparation.  Accentu- 
ation or  modulation  of  .  the  high  lights  and  shadows  will  in 
all  probability  be  necessary  to  secure  a  sufficient  contrast  of 
light  and  shade.  The  middle  tints  may  require  but  little 
attention,  unless  it  be  to  work  down  any  tendency  to  abrupt- 
ness in  the  gradations  of  tone.  A  bold  and  well-defined 
silver  print  usually  copies  well  when  clamped  between  two 
pieces  of  glass  to  take  out  the  grain,  and  photographed  by 
artificial  light. 

Scraper  boards  offer  most  remarkable  possibilities  for 
black  and  white  and  half-tone  sketches.  A  careful  examina- 
tion of  Fig.  2  9  will  serve  to  demonstrate  their  peculiar  fitness 
for  process  drawing.  A  light  wood  pulp  board  forms  a  con- 


go  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

venient  base  upon  which  a  thick  coating  of  white  composition 
is  laid.  Black  ruled  lines  are  printed  on  this  surface,  and 
lines  of  a  similar  texture  are  embossed  at  right  angles  to 
them.  Some  of  the  characteristic  effects  which  can  be  pro- 
duced on  this  board  by  the  use  of  the  crayon  and  scraper  are 
suggested  by  Nos.  6  and  7,  Fig.  30.  No.  8  gives  a  stipple 
which  is  both  printed  and  embossed.  No.  9  is  a  plain  board 
upon  which  pen-and-scraper  effects  alone  are  produced. 
Drawings  in  pen  and  ink,  on  Nos.  1 0  and  1 1  patterns,  may 
be  effectively  handled  by  a  free  and  skilful  use  of  the  scraper. 
Embossed  lines  only  are  the  peculiar  features  of  these  boards, 
but  variety  of  texture  can  be  obtained  by  scraping  these  lines 
into  dots. 

Scraper  board  sketches  almost  invariably  represent  a 
maximum  of  effect  with  a  minimum  of  work,  and  for  this 
reason  alone  such  an  adaptable  and  simple  medium  should 
soon  win  its  way  into  general  favour. 

Their  merit,  however,  is  not  confined  to  this  one  point. 
They  provide  almost  unrivalled  copy  for  photo  reproduction, 
and  can  therefore  be  applied  to  a  variety  of  purposes.  Even 
a  cursory  glance  at  the  scraper  board  sketch  on  page  91  will 
reveal  many  points  of  interest  and  value  which  a  more  careful 
scrutiny  can  scarcely  fail  to  emphasise. 

Small  patches  of  scraper  boards  can  be  introduced  into 
process  drawings  of  any  description,  and  brilliant  results  be 
secured  thereby.  In  such  a  manner  clouds,  waves,  foliage, 
and  a  variety  of  other  effects  can  be  introduced. 

Shading  mediums  are  already  well  known  to  lithographers, 
yet  it  is  doubtful  if  their  usefulness  for  the  amplification 
of  sketches  or  process  drawings  is  fully  appreciated.  They 
offer  almost  endless  combinations  of  texture  and  tint,  and  are 
therefore  most  useful  and  valuable  accessories  in  the  hands  of 
a  resourceful  artist. 

Many  artists  favour  crayon  work  on  a  grained  paper,  adopt- 


a 

fefl 

.3 

I 


• 


VERSIT 


PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHY  95 

ing  a  broad  sketchy  treatment  in  liberal  proportions,  so  that  in 
the  subsequent  reduction  the  freedom  of  the  original  will  be 
toned  down  just  sufficiently  to  enhance  the  picturesque  and 
artistic  value.  Drawings  made  on  scraper  boards,  grained 
papers,  or  by  the  aid  of  shading  mediums,  are  photo- 
graphed and  reproduced  by  the  ordinary  line  method.  In 
making  sketches  for  "  half-tone  "  photo-mechanical  reproduc- 
tion it  must  be  remembered  that,  as  far  as  photo-lithography 
is  concerned,  it  is  impossible  to  accentuate  effects  by  what  is 
known  as  "  fine  etching "  when  applied  to  photo-engraving. 
A  negative  for  photo-process  work  of  any  description  should 
be  absolutely  perfect  in  every  respect.  The  whites  of  the 
copy  in  the  negative  should  be  of  an  absolutely  opaque  black, 
showing  clean,  sharp  edges,  with  clear  glass  representing  the 
lines,  dots,  etc.  These  are  all-important  factors,  and  their 
influence  upon  the  reproduction  of  the  original  can  scarcely 
be  over-estimated. 


CHAPTEE    XVII 

PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHY — continued 

A    Copying    Table — Exposure — Illumination — -Photo-lithe    Transfers — 
The  Paper — Printing — Developing — A  Direct  Process. 

To  discuss  the  respective  merits  of  the  "  wet "  collodion, 
collodion  emulsion,  and  dry-plate  processes  lies  beyond  the 
province  of  this  work,  as  does  also  a  detailed  description  of 
the  operations  involved. 

The  processes  are  purely  photographic,  and  have  already 
been  presented  to  the  craft  in  various  forms.  It  is,  moreover, 
almost  impossible  to  bring  within  the  limits  of  a  single 
chapter  anything  approaching  to  a  comprehensive  record  of 
the  multitudinous  details  upon  which  process  photography  is 
based.  All  that  can  be  attempted  is  to  take  one  or  two  out- 
standing features  which  suggest  a  few  useful  hints. 

The  original  or  copy  for  reproduction  must  be  on  the 
same  optical  plane  as  the  sensitive  plate  in  the  camera,  i.e. 
they  must  be  absolutely  parallel  with  each  other.  There 
are  several  ways  of  ensuring  this.  The  most  convenient 
method  is  to  use  a  copying  table  and  board  similar  to  Fig.  31. 
With  such  an  arrangement  as  this  direct  copying  can  be 
attained  through  the  lens,  or  the  camera  can  be  turned  half- 
way round,  and  the  image  reversed  by  means  of  a  mirror 
or  prism  attachment.  The  chief  advantage  of  such  an 
arrangement  is,  that  the  position  of  the  camera  can  be 
altered  at  will  without  affecting  the  relative  positions  of  the 
plate  and  copy. 


PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHY  99 

Correct  exposure  and  sufficient  illumination  of  the 
copy  are  important  factors  in  photographic  reproductions  of 
any  kind,  but  they  are  of  infinitely  greater  importance  when 
applied  to  photo-process  reproduction.  One  is,  to  a  certain 
extent,  dependent  upon  the  other.  The  former  must  of 
necessity  be  controlled  by  the  latter ;  yet  no  amount  of 
exposure  will  compensate  for  defective  illumination.  Where 
artificial  light  is  employed  the  advantage  of  using  two  lights 
is  obviously  great.  Apart  from  the  greater  brilliancy  and 
intensity  of  the  light,  the  illumination  of  the  copy  is  more 
evenly  distributed.  In  scraper-board  copies  no  shadows  are 
thrown  from  the  embossed  dots  or  lines,  arid  the  granular 
texture  of  grained  papers  is  almost  entirely  eliminated. 

A  bichromated,  gelatine  paper  can  be  obtained  by  coating 
a  hard  writing  paper  of  medium  thickness  with  a  gelatinous 
solution  consisting  of  1  oz.  of  gelatine  and  1  oz.  of  water, 
and  afterwards  sensitising  it  with  bichromate  of  potassium. 
It  is  advisable,  however,  to  use  the  commercial  varieties  of 
coated  paper,  and  to  sensitise  it  as  it  is  required. 

The  sensitising  solution  can  be  prepared  by  dissolving 
1  oz.  of  bichromate  of  potassium  in  20  fluid  oz.  of  water. 
Add  to  this  sufficient  ammonia  to  give  it  a  bright  orange 
tinge.  Keep  this  solution  at  a  temperature  of  60°  Fahr., 
and  float  the  paper  on  it  for  about  one  minute.  Pin  or 
clip  the  paper  to  a  board  or  squeeze  it  to  glass,  and  dry  in 
a  dark  room. 

Print  this  paper  under  the  negative  in  a  diffused  light 
until  the  design  appears  in  a  rich  golden-brown  colour, 
when  the  exposure  may  be  regarded  as  sufficient.  The  time 
allowed  for  such  an  exposure  will,  of  course,  vary  according 
to  the  quality  of  the  negative  and  the  intensity  of  the  light. 

A  development  of  the  print  may  now  be  proceeded  with 
in  the  following  manner. 

Thin   down  a   little    transfer    ink    with    turpentine    and 


TOO  PRACTICAL   LITHOGRAPHY 

distribute  it  evenly  on  a  composition  roller.  Koll  up  the 
print  until  it  is  completely  covered  with  an  exceedingly 
fine  film  of  ink,  after  which  allow  the  turpentine  to 
evaporate.  Immerse  the  transfer  in  tepid  water  for  about 
10  minutes,  and  then  rub  it  gently  with  a  piece  of  cotton 
lint  previously  soaked  in  water,  until  the  superfluous  ink  is 
removed  and  the  design  stands  out  clean  and  sharp. 

The  transference  of  the  print  to  stone  can  be  accom- 
plished in  the  usual  lithographic  manner.  The  chief  points 
to  be  observed  are,  to  allow  sufficient  time  for  printing,  and 
to  ink  up  the  transfer  with  the  thinnest  possible  film  of  ink. 

A  photo  print  can  be  made  direct  on  the  zinc  or 
aluminium  plate,  and  by  a  slight  modification  of  the  photo- 
engraving process  it  can  be  developed  according  to  litho- 
graphic methods. 

It  is  impossible  to  introduce  an  intermediate  process 
without,  in  some  manner  at  least,  depreciating  the  quality  of 
the  work.  In  a  direct  photo  print  on  zinc,  or,  in  fact,  on  any 
suitable  printing  surface,  the  finer  qualities  of  the  work  are 
much  more  likely  to  be  retained  than  when  a  transfer  print 
is  made  under  the  negative  and  afterwards  transferred  in 
the  usual  manner. 

Coat  a  finely  grained  zinc  plate  with  sensitised  asphalt 
solution  and  expose  it  under  a  negative  for  about  4J  minutes 
in  direct  sunlight,  and  from  12  to  15  minutes  in  a  diffused 
light.  The  action  of  light  on  the  asphalt  solution  is  to 
render  it  insoluble  in  turpentine,  so  that  if  a  sufficiently 
exposed  plate  is  immersed  in  pure  turpentine  the  lines,  etc., 
of  the  design,  being  of  course  represented  by  clear  lines 
in  the  negative,  will  remain  intact,  while  the  surrounding 
portions  will  be  dissolved  and  washed  away.  After  develop- 
ment wash  the  plate  freely  in  water,  and  dry  it  by  fanning 
or  with  a  pair  of  bellows.  Let  it  stand  for  about  10  minutes 
and  then  slightly  etch  it  with  a  very  weak  solution  of  nitric 


PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHY  101 

acid.  Cover  the  work  with  strong,  fresh  gum,  and  dry  it 
thoroughly  and  quickly.  Eemove  the  gum  and  "  rub  up " 
the  design  with  black  ink  in  the  usual  way.  Wash,  dry, 
and  dust  over  with  French  chalk.  The  plate  can  then  be 
prepared  in  the  manner  described  in  Chap.  XI.  page  61. 


THE    END 


INDEX 


PAGE 

PAGE 

ADJUSTING  pressure  in  machine 

38 

Colours,  standard 

55 

Adjusting  stones  in  machine 
Air  drying  —  tin  printing     . 

.       37 

78,  79 

Copperplate  press 
Printing 

17 
17-19 

Alum          .... 

.       27 

Stove      .... 

.       18 

Aluminium  plates 

.       57 

Copy,  photo-litho 

.       87 

Aluminium  plates  — 

Copying  table     . 

.        96 

Alterations 

.       62 

Crayon  or  chalk  drawing    . 

8 

Direct  photo  .         .         .58, 

85,  99 

Crayon  work 

88,  90 

Etching  .... 

61 

Cylinder  press    . 

21 

Machining 

.       65 

Printing  bed  . 
Rolling  up 

.       65 
60 

Damping  rollers 

.       40 
24 

Sensitising 
Transferring    . 
Aluminium  rotary  machine 
American  printers 
Asphalt  solution 

.       97 
.       59 
65,  66 
.       53 
.       99 

Design,  inverted 
Design,  suitable 
Development,  photo  print  . 
Direct  impression,  A  . 
Discoloration 

.       68 
.       80 
99 
.       72 
.       70 

Distortion  ....  49, 

68,  75 

Bavarian  limestone     . 

.       12 

Dryers 

71 

Blocking  out 
Blue  tinge  .... 
Boxwood  scraper 
Brake  cylinder   . 
Bronze  printing  . 

54,  55 
70,  77 
.        20 
38 
.       49 

Drying  colours   . 
Drying  metal  plates   . 
Drying  racks 
Duplication  of  design 

50,  71 
77,  78 
78.  79 
30,  31 

Cam  motion 

21 

Effect  of  pinks  and  greys    . 

49 

Canada  balsam  . 

54 

Effects  in  tin-plate  printing 

81 

Castor  oil  .... 

28 

Elastic  bedding  . 

22,  23 

Cause  and  effect 

2 

Electricity 

46 

Ceramic  decoration 

.       55 

Elements  of  lithography     . 

2 

Chalk  drawings  . 

25,  26 

Embossed  lines  . 

88 

Chemical  affinity 
Clean  stones 

2 
3 

Plates     .... 
Embossing  discs 

82 
82,  83 

Cohesion  in  printing  ink     . 
Colour  and  design 
Changes 

54 
.       48 
70 

Enamelled  paper 
Etching      .... 
Evolution  of  tin-plate  printing 

51 
25,  26 
.       67 

Mixing  .... 

31 

Exposure    .... 

.       98 

Printing 

.      47 

Registration    . 

.       48 

Fine  etching 

.       95 

Sequence         .         .         .48, 

50,  76 

French  chalk 

71,  76 

Super-position 

48,  81 

Skins      .... 

.       28 

Transparencies 

55 

Friction  glazed  paper 

51 

102 


INDEX 


103 


Glass  muller 

PAGE 

6 

Oiiginal  stones  .        ,7 

PAGE 

.       30 

Gold  lacquer       .    •    .         -77, 

82,  83 

Outline  forme     . 

.       48 

Gold  printing     .         .         .  • 

49 

Grain,  natural    . 

.       87 

Packing  cylinder 

.       22 

Graining  stones  .         ..      ,  . 

.    5,  6 

Paper,  enamelled         .c!y     . 

61 

Grinding  stones  .         , 

.     4-G 

Well  seasoned 

49-51 

42 

Pen  and  ink  sketches           .,  ' 

89 

Gripper  margins     "    .      '*.  • 

31 

Pen  and  scraper  effects 

.       9Q 

Grit   .         .         .         .    -     . 

.       43 

Photo  litho  — 

Copy       . 

89 

Half-tone,  plioto-litho 

.       84 

Development      '     .    •     . 

98,  100 

Halligan  machine       . 

34-36 

Direct            •           . 

.       85 

Hand  labour  and  machine  . 

3 

Half-tone               :   . 

.  "*  86 

21 

Inception  of             .    •     . 

84 

Roller     .         .         .'     •   .    _ 

28 

Line 

.       85 

High  lights 

.       89 

Printing 

.       99 

Homogeneity  of  stones        ..  " 

2 

Transfer 

.       85 

Transfer  papei 

.       98 

Illumination  of  copy  .         . 

.       98 

Plumbago  .         .         ... 

.       22 

Impression 

.       27 

Porosity  of  stones 

2 

Impression,  size  of 

.       75 

Preparation  of  stones  . 

.     2-7 

Impression,  solid 
Inking  rollers     .    .     . 

.       46 
.       39 

Preparing  designs        .         . 
Pressure  alterations    . 

24,  25 
.       43 

Inks,  printing    . 

52-56 

Excessive        ... 

.       37 

Tin  -plate  printing  . 

69-71 

Litho  press      .         .         « 

.       20 

Transfer          .  -      ._ 

.   8-11 

Peculiarities    . 

75,  76 

Inverted  design  .         . 

.       68 

Printing  inks    --«-.. 

.       52 

Cohesion  of     . 

53 

Key  formes 

27,  41 

Printing  medium 

1 

Proving                                  '. 

29,  30 

Lacquer,  peculiar  feature  of 

.       83 

Lacquer,  tin-plate 

.       77 

Recipes,  transfer  inks 

.  9-11 

Lamp-black 

.       28 

Transfer  papers 

13-15 

Leather  dressing^X  r 

22 

Reciprocal  movement 

.       72 

Level  surfaces 

3 

Reducing  medium 

53,  54 

Levelling  stones          -.    .     . 

.       37 

Register  lines 

29,  30 

Line,  photo-litho 

85 

Registration 

29,  41 

Linoleum   .... 

.       23 

Registration  of  colour 

.       48 

Linseed  oil          ... 

52,  53 

Remedy,  A          ... 

71 

Litho  press  for  Copperplate          .       19 
Litho  press,  mechanical  principles 

Re-transfening  . 
Rotary  machine,  printing  . 

.       31 

65,  66 

20,  21 

Rubber  blanket  . 

72-75 

Litho  press,  pressure  . 

.       20 

Resilience  of  . 

.       76 

Litho  varnish 

52,  53 

Scraper       .         .         . 

20-22 

Magnesia    . 

.       71 

Scraper  boards    .         . 

89,  90 

Mechanical  affinity     .      ~  "7 

2 

Scratches    .... 

3 

Metal  plates        .         .     W  . 

.       57 

Screen  effect 

86 

Method       .         .         .         , 

45 

Screen  photo 

86 

Modification  of  colour  sequence 

48 

Senefelder  .... 

2 

Motor  driving     . 

7       46 

Sensitising  solution     . 

99 

Sequence  of  colour 

48 

Nap  roller  .... 

.       28 

Set  off        .         .         .         . 

71 

Natural  grain     .         . 

.       87 

Shading  mediums 

90 

Negative    .         .     •.../. 

88 

Shadow                                   i 

89 

Sheen  of  metal  plate  . 

70 

Offsets         .         .'.-.'-. 

27,  28 

Side  lay      .         . 

42 

Oriental  blue  tinge 

70,  77 

Silver  print         ... 

89 

104 


INDEX 


Slogger 
Sludge 

PAGE 

.       38 
5 

Transfer  paper  (contd.}  — 
Stone  to  stone 

PAGE 
13 

Solid  oil     . 

.       53 

Transparent    . 

13,  14 

Speed 

.  36,  37,  46 

Varnished 

13 

Speed  cones 

46 

Transfer  printing 

.       55 

Standard  colours 

.         .       55 

Transferring 

.   32,  33,  99 

Stone-planing  machine 

.    3,  4 

Transparencies   . 

55 

Stone-  polishing  machine 

.    4,  5 

Trimming  paper 

.       43 

Stoving  tin-plates 

.       78 

Tympan 

21,  22 

Transferred  prints  . 

69 

Substitutes  for  stone  . 

.       57 

V-shaped  edge    . 

22 

Suggestion,  A     . 

49 

Varnish,  litho     . 

52,  53 

Super-position  of  colours 

48 

54 

Venetian  red 

.       28 

Tooth  of  grained  stones 

•7 

Of  metal  plates 

.       58 

Water  of  Ayr  stone     . 

.       25 

Transfer  inks  — 

White  printing  . 

.  70,  76,  77 

Active  principle  of  . 

.    8,  9 

Copperplate     . 

10,  11 

Zinc  plates 

.       57 

Extra  powerful 

4 

Zinc  plates  — 

Plate       . 

9 

Alterations 

62 

Stone  to  stone 

10 

Depolishing    . 

.       58 

Writing  . 

.  9,  10 

Etching  . 

.       61 

Transfer  paper  — 
Autographic   . 

14 

Graining 
Machining 

.       58 
.       65 

Copperplate    . 

14,  15 

Photo,  direct  . 

.  58,  83,  97 

Diaphanic 

16 

Printing  bed  . 

.       65 

Grained  . 

15,  16 

Rolling  up 

.       60 

Photo-litho     .. 

16,  99 

Sensitising 

99 

Specific  value  of 

12 

Transferring  to 

.       59 

Printed  by  MORRISON  &  GIBB  LIMITED,  Edinburgh 


JANUARY,  1905. 


Catalogue 

OF 

Special  G)eef)nieal  LUorks 


FOR 


MANUFACTURERS,  STUDENTS,  AND  TECHNICAL 
SCHOOLS 

BY   EXPERT   WRITERS 


INDEX   TO   SUBJECTS. 

PAGE 

PAGE 

PAGE 

Agricultural  Chemistry    ...  10 
Air,  Industrial  Use  of       ...  11 

Dyers'  Materials     21 
Dye-stuffs     22 

Petroleum     ...    6 
Pigments,  Chemistry  of    ...     2 

Alum  and  its  Sulphates    ...     9 

Enamelling  Metal  18 

Plumbers'  Work     27 

Ammonia       9 

Enamels        18 

Porcelain  Painting  18 

Aniline  Colours       3 

Engraving     31 

Pottery  Clays          16 

Animal  Fats  6 

Essential  Oils          7 

Pottery  Manufacture        ...  14 

Anti-corrosive  Paints        ...     4 

Evaporating  Apparatus    ...  26 

Power-loom  Weaving       ...  19 

Architecture,  Terms  in     ...  30 

External  Plumbing  27 

Preserved  Foods    30 

Architectural  Pottery       ...   16 

Fats                                         5,  6 

Printers'  Ready  Reckoner  31 

Artificial  Perfumes  7 

Faults  in  Woollen  Goods...  20 

Printing  Inks           3 

Balsams        10 

Gas  Firing     26 

Recipes  for  Oilmen,  etc.  ...     3 

Bibliography            32 
Bleaching      23 
Bone  Products        8 

Glass-making  Recipes      ...  17 
Glass  Painting         17 
Glue  Making  and  Testing...     8 

Resins                         ..          ..  10 

Risks  of  Occupations        ...  11 
Rivetting  China,  etc.         ...  16 

Bookbinding             31 

Greases          5 

Sanitary  Plumbing            .  .  28 

Brick-making           ...         15,  16 

History  of  Staffs  Potteries  16 

Scheele's  Essays    .. 

.  .     9 

Burnishing  Brass    ...         ...  28 

Hops  28 

Sealing  Waxes 

.  .  11 

Carpet  Yarn  Printing        ...  21 
Ceramic  Books       ...        14,  15 

Hot-water  Supply  28 
How  to  make  a  Woollen  Mill 

Silk  Dyeing  
Silk  Throwing 

..  22 
.  .  19 

Charcoal        8 

Pay             

21 

Smoke  Prevention  .. 

..  26 

Chemical  Essays    ..          ...     9 

India-rubber            .,. 

.13 

Soaps  ... 

...     7 

Chemistry  of  Pottery        ...  17 

Inks     ...         3 

11 

Spinning 

...  20 

Chemistry  of  Dye-stuffs    ...  23 

Iron-corrosion 

4 

Staining  Marble,  an< 

1  Bone  31 

Clay  Analysis           16 

Iron,  Science  of      

26 

Steam  Drying 

...  11 

Coal-dust  Firing      26 

Japanning      

28 

Sugar  Refining 

...  32 

Colour  Matching     21 

Lacquering    ... 

28 

Steel  Hardening     .. 

...  26 

Colliery  Recovery  Work  ...  25 
Colour-mixing  for  Dyers  ...  21 

Lake  Pigments        
Lead  and  its  Compounds  .. 

2 
11 

Sweetmeats  
Terra-cotta  

...  30 
...  16 

Colour  Theory         22 
Combing  Machines...        ...  24 
Compounding  Oils  ...         ..      6 

Leather  Industry    
Leather-working  Material 
Lithography             

13 
14 
31 

Testing  Paint  Mater 
Testing  Yarns 
Textile  Fabrics 

als   ...     4 
...  20 
...  20 

Condensing  Apparatus     ..    26 

Lubricants    

5,6 

Textile  Materials    .. 

19,20 

Cosmetics     8 

Manures        1 

10 

Timber           

...  29 

Cotton  Dyeing         23 
Cotton  Spinning     24 

Mineral  Pigments  
Mine  Ventilation    

3 
25 

Varnishes      
Vegetable  Fats 

...     4 
...     7 

Damask  Weaving  20 

Mine  Haulage          

25 

Waste  Utilisation  .. 

...  10 

Dampness  in  Buildings     ..    30 

Oil  and  Colour  Recipes    .. 

3 

Water,  Industrial  Use      ...  12 

Decorators'  Books  28 

Oil  Boiling     

4 

Waterproofing  Fabrics    ...  21 

Decorative  Textiles          ...  20 

Oil  Merchants'  Manual    ...     7 

Weaving  Calculations      ...  20 

Dental  Metallurgy  ...         ...  25 

Oils                            5 

Wood  Waste  Utilisation  ...  29 

Dictionaryof  Paint  Materials  2 
Drying  Oils  5 

Ozone,  Industrial  Use  of..    12 
Paint  Manufacture  2 

Wood  Dyeing                      ...  31 
Wool  Dyeing                     22,  23 

Drying  with  Air      12 

Paint  Materials       3 

Writing  Inks                      ...  11 

Dyeing  Marble        31 

Paint-material  Testing     ...     4 

X-Ray  Work                      ...  13 

Dyeing  Woollen  Fabrics  ...  23 

Paper-pulp  Dyeing  18 

Yarn  Testing                      ...  20 

PUBLISHED    BY 

SCOTT,   GREENWOOD   &   CO., 

19    LUDGATE    HILL,    LONDON,    E.G. 

Tel.  Address:  "PBINTERIES,  LONDON".  Tel.  No.  5403.  Bank. 


Paints,  Colours  and  Printing 
Inks. 

THE  CHEMISTRY  OP  PIGMENTS.     By  ERNEST  J.  PARRY, 
B.Sc.  (Lond.),  F.I.C.,  F.C.S.,  and  J.  H.  COSTE,  F.I.C.,  F.C.S.     Demy 
8vo.      Five  Illustrations.      285  pp.     1902.      Price  10s.   6d.  ;    India  and 
Colonies,  11s.;    Other  Countries,  12s.;    strictly  net. 
Contents. 

r  (Introductory.  Light— White  Light— The  Spectrum— The  Invisible  Spectrum— Normal 
Spectrum — Simple  Nature  of  Pure  Spectral  Colour — The  Recomposition  of  White  Light — 
Primary  and  Complementary  Colours— Coloured  Bodies— Absorption  Spectra— The  Appli= 
cation  of  Pigments.  Uses  of  Pigments  :  Artistic,  Decorative,  Protective— Methods  of 
Application  of  Pigments  :  Pastels  and  Crayons,  Water  Colour,  Tempera  Painting,  Fresco, 
Encaustic  Painting,  Oil-colour  Painting,  Keramic  Art,  Enamel,  Stained  and  Painted  Glass, 
Mosaic — Inorganic  Pigments.  White  Lead — Zinc  White — Enamel  White — Whitening — 
Red  Lead— Litharge— Vermilion— Royal  Scarlet— The  Chromium  Greens— Chromates  of  Lead, 
Zinc,  Silver  and  Mercury — Brunswick  Green — The  Ochres — Indian  Red — Venetian  Red — 
Siennas  and  Umbers— Light  Red— Cappagh  Brown— Red  Oxides— Mars  Colours— Terre  Verte 
— Prussian  Brown  —  Cobalt  Colours  —  Coeruleum  —  Smalt — Copper  Pigments — Malachite — 
Bremen  Green  —  Scheele's  Green  —  Emerald  Green  —  Verdigris — Brunswick  Green — Non- 
arsenical  Greens — Copper  Blues — Ultramarine — Carbon  Pigments — Ivory  Black — Lamp' Black 
^-Bistre — Naples  Yellow — Arsenic  Sulphides  :  Orpiment,  Realgar — Cadmium  Yellow — 
Vandyck  Brown— Organic  Pigments.  Prussian  Blue— Natural  Lakes— Cochineal— Carmine 
— Crimson  —  Lac  Dye  —  Scarlet  —  Madder  —  Alizarin — Campeachy — Quercitron — Rhamnus — 
Brazil  Wood— Alkanet— Santal  Wood— Archil— Coal-tar  Lakes— Red  Lakes— Alizarin  Com- 
pounds— Orange  and  Yellow  Lakes — Green  and  Blue  Lakes — Indigo — Dragon's  Blood — 
Gamboge — Sepia — Indian  Yellow,  Puree — Bitumen.  Asphaltum,  Mummy — Index. 

THE  MANUFACTURE  OP  PAINT.  A  Practical  Handbook 
for  Paint  Manufacturers,  Merchants  and  Painters.  By  J.  CRUICKSHANK 
SMITH,  B.Sc.  Demy  8vo.  1901.  200pp.  Sixty  Illustrations  and  One 
Large  Diagram.  Price  7s.  6d.  ;  India  and  Colonies,  8s.  ;  Other 
Countries,  8s.  6d.  ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Preparation  of  Raw  Material — Storing  of  Raw  Material — Testing  and  Valuation  of  Raw 
Material — Paint  Plant  and  Machinery — The  Grinding  of  White  Lead — Grinding  of  White 
Zinc — Grinding  of  other  White  Pigments — Grinding  of  Oxide  Paints — Grinding  of  Staining 
Colours— Grinding  of  Black  Paints — Grinding  of  Chemical  Colours — Yellows — Grinding  of 
Chemical  Colours — Blues — Grinding  Greens — Grinding  Reds — Grinding  Lakes— Grinding 
Colours  in  Water — Grinding  Colours  in  Turpentine— The  Uses  of  Paint — Testing  and  Matching 
Paints— Economic  Considerations — Index. 

DICTIONARY  :  OF  CHEMICALS  AND  RAW  PRO- 
DUCTS USED  IN  THE  MANUFACTURE  OF 
PAINTS,  COLOURS,  VARNISHES  AND  ALLIED 
PREPARATIONS.  By  GEORGE  H.  HURST,  F.C.S.  Demy 
8vo.  380  pp.  1901.  Price  7s.  6d.;  India  and  Colonies,  8s.;  Other 
Countries,  8s.  6d. ;  strictly  net. 

THE  MANUFACTURE  OF  LAKE  PIGMENTS  FROM 
ARTIFICIAL  COLOURS.  By  FRANCIS  H.  JENNISON, 
F.I.C.,  F.C.S.  Sixteen  Coloured  Plates,  showing  Specimens  of 
Eighty-nine  Colours,  specially  prepared  from  the  Recipes  given 
in  the  Book.  136  pp.  Demy  8vo.  1900.  Price  7s.  6d. ;  India  and 
Colonies,  8s. ;  Other  Countries,  8s.  6d. ;  strictly  net. 
Contents. 

The  Groups  of  the  Artificial  Colouring  Matters — The  Nature  and  Manipulation  of  Artificial 
Colours — Lake-forming  Bodies  for  Acid  Colours — Lake-forming  Bodies'  Basic  Colours — Lake 
Bases — The  Principles  of  Lake  Formation — Red  Lakes — Orange,  Yellow,  Green,  Blue,  Violet 
and  Black  Lakes — The  Production  of  Insoluble  Azo  Colours  in  the  Form  of  Pigments — The 
General  Properties  of  Lakes  Produced  from  Artificial  Co'lours— Washing,  Filtering  and  Fin- 
ishing— Matching  and  Testing  Lake  Pigments — Index. 


THE  MANUFACTURE  OF  MINERAL  AND  LAKE 
PIGMENTS.  Containing  Directions  for  the  Manufacture 
of  all  Artificial,  Artists  and  Painters'  Colours,  Enamel,  Soot  and  Me- 
tallic Pigments.  A  Text-book  for  Manufacturers,  Merchants,  Artists 
and  Painters.  By  Dr.  JOSEF  BERSCH.  Translated  by  A.  C.  WRIGHT, 
M.A.  (Oxon.),  B.Sc.  (Lond.).  Forty-three  Illustrations.  476  pp.,  demy 
8vo.  1901.  Price  12s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies  13s.  6d.  ;  Other 
Countries,  15s. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Introduction — Physico-chemical  Behaviour  of  Pigments — Raw  Materials  Employed  in 
the  Manufacture  of  Pigments— Assistant  Materials— Metallic  Compounds— The  Manufacture 
of  Mineral  Pigments— The  Manufacture  of  White  Lead— Enamel  White— Washing  Apparatus 
—  Zinc  White  — Yellow  Mineral  Pigments  — Chrome  Yellow  — Lead  Oxide  Pigments  — 
Other  Yellow  Pigments— Mosaic  Gold— Red  Mineral  Pigments— The  Manufacture  of  Ver- 
milion—Antimony Vermilion— Ferric  Oxide  Pigments— Other  Red  Mineral  Pigments— Purple 
of  Cassius — Blue  Mineral  Pigments — Ultramarine  —  Manufacture  of  Ultramarine  —  Blue 
Copper  Pigments— Blue  Cobalt  Pigments— Smalts— Green  Mineral  Pigments— Emerald 
Green — Verdigris — Chromium  Oxide — Other  Green  Chromium  Pigments — Green  Cobalt  Pig- 
ments— Green  Manganese  Pigments — Compounded  Green  Pigments — Violet  Mineral  Pig- 
ments— Brown  Mineral  Pigments — Brown  Decomposition  Products — Black  Pigments— Manu- 
facture of  Soot  Pigments— Manufacture  of  Lamp  Black— The  Manufacture  of  Soot  Black 
without  Chambers— Indian  Ink— Enamel  Colours— Metallic  Pigments— Bronze  Pigments- 
Vegetable  Bronze  Pigments. 

PIGMENTS  OF  ORGANIC  ORIGIN— Lakes— Yellow  Lakes— Red  Lakes— Manufacture  of 
Carmine — The  Colouring  Matter  of  Lac — Safflower  or  Carthamine  Red — Madder  and 
its  Colouring  Matters— Madder  Lakes— Manjit  (Indian  Madder)— Lichen  Colouring  Matters- 
Red  Wood  Lakes— The  Colouring  Matters  of  Sandal  Wood  and  Other  Dye  Woods— Blue 
Lakes— Indigo  Carmine — The  Colouring  Matter  of  Log  Wood — Green  Lakes — Brown  Organic 
Pigments— Sap  Colours— Water  Colours— Crayons— Confectionery  Colours— The  Preparation 
of  Pigments  for  Painting — The  Examination  of  Pigments — Examination  of  Lakes — The 
Testing  of  Dye-Woods— The  Design  of  a  Colour  Works— Commercial  Names  of  Pigments- 
Appendix  :  Conversion  of  Metric  to  English  Weights  and  Measures— Centigrade  and  Fahrenheit 
Thermometer  Scales — Index. 

RECIPES  FOR  THE  COLOUR,  PAINT,  VARNISH,  OIL, 
SOAP  AND  DRYSALTERY  TRADES.  Compiled  by 
AN  ANALYTICAL  CHEMIST.  350  pp.  1902.  Demy  8vo.  Price  7s.  6d. ; 
India  and  British  Colonies,  8s. ;  Other  Countries,  8s.  6d. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Pigments  or  Colours  for  Paints,  Lithographic  and  Letterpress  Printing  Inks,  etc. — 
Mixed  Paints  and  Preparations  for  Paint-making,  Painting,  Lime-washing,  Paperhanging, 
etc. — Varnishes  for  Coach-builders,  Cabinetmakers,  Wood-workers,  Metal-workers,  Photo- 
graphers, .etc. — Soaps  for  Toilet,  Cleansing,  Polishing,  etc. — Perfumes — Lubricating  Greases, 
Oils,  etc. — Cements,  Pastes,  Glues  and  Other  Adhesive  Preparations — Writing,  Marking, 
Endorsing  and  Other  Inks — Sealing-wax  and  Office  Requisites — Preparations  for  the  Laundry, 
Kitchen,  Stable  and  General  Household^  Uses — Disinfectant  Preparations — Miscellaneous 
Preparations — Index. 

OIL  COLOURS  AND  PRINTING  INKS.  By  Louis 
EDGAR  ANDES.  Translated  from  the  German.  215  pp.  Crown  8vo. 
56  Illustrations.  1903.  Price  5s. ;  India  and  British  Colonies,  5s.  6d. ; 
Other  Countries,  6s. ;  strictly  Net. 

Contents. 

Linseed  Oil — Poppy  Oil — Mechanical  Purification  of  Linseed  Oil — Chemical  Purification  of 
Linseed  Oil — Bleaching  Linseed  Oil — Oxidizing  Agents  for  Boiling  Linseed  Oil — Theory  of 
Oil  Boiling— Manufacture  of  Boiled  Oil— Adulterations  of  Boiled  Oil— Chinese  Drying  Oil  and 
Other  Specialities — Pigments  for  House  and  Artistic  Painting  and  Inks — Pigment  for 
Printers'  Black  Inks — Substitutes  for  Lampblack — Machinery  for  Colour  Grinding  and 
Rubbing — Machines  for  mixing  Pigments  with  the  Vehicle — Paint  Mills — Manufacture  of 
House  Oil  Paints — Ship  Paints  —  Luminous  Paint — Artists'  Colours — Printers'  Inks: — 
VEHICLES— Printers'  Inks:— PIGMENTS  and  MANUFACTURE— Index. 
(See  also  Writing  Inks,  p.  n.) 


SIMPLE      METHODS      FOR      TESTING      PAINTERS' 
MATERIALS.     By   A.    C.   WRIGHT,    M.A.    (Oxon.),   B.Sc, 
(Lond.).      Crown  8vo.      160  pp.      1903.     Price  5s. ;    India   and    British 
Colonies,  5s.  6d. ;  Other  Countries,  6s. ;  strictly  Net. 
Contents. 

Necessity  for  Testing  —  Standards  —  Arrangement  —  The  Apparatus — The  Reagents  — 
Practical  Tests— Dry  Colours— Stiff  Paints — Liquid  and  Enamel  Paints — Oil  Varnishes — 
Spirit  Varnishes— Driers— Putty— Linseed  Oil— Turpentine— Water  Stains— The  Chemical 
Examination — Dry  Colours  and  Paints — White  Pigments  and  Paints — Yellow  Pigments  and 
Paints — Blue  Pigments  and  Paints — Green  Pigments  and  Paints — Red  Pigments  and  Paints — 
Brown  Pigments  and  Paints — Black  Pigments  and  Paints— Oil  Varnishes — linseed  Oil — 
Turpentine. 

IRON  -  CORROSION,  ANTI  -  FOULING  AND  ANTI- 
CORROSIVE  PAINTS.  Translated  from  the  German  of 
Louis  EDGAR  ANDES.  Sixty-two  Illustrations.  275  pp.  Demy  8vo. 
1900.  Price  10s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  11s.;  Other  Countries,  12s.; 
strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Iron-rust  and  its  Formation — Protection  from  Rusting  by  Paint — Grounding  the  Iron  with 
Linseed  Oil,  etc. — Testing  Paints — Use  of  Tar  for  Painting  on  Iron — Anti-corrosive  Paints — 
Linseed  Varnish — Chinese  Wood  Oil — Lead  Pigments — Iron  Pigments — Artificial  Iron  Oxides 
— Carbon — Preparation  of  Anti-corrosive  Paints — Results  of  Examination  of  Several  Anti- 
corrosive  Paints — Paints  for  Ship's  Bottoms — Anti-fouling  Compositions — Various  Anti-cor- 
.rosive  and  Ship's  Paints — Official  Standard  Specifications  for  Ironwork  Paints — Index. 

THE  TESTING  AND  VALUATION  OF  RAW  MATE- 
RIALS USED  IN  PAINT  AND  COLOUR  MANU- 
FACTURE. By  M.  W.  JONES,  F.C.S.  A  Book  for  the 
Laboratories  of  Colour  Works.  88  pp.  Crown  8vo.  1900.  Price  5s.  ; 
India  and  Colonies,  5s.  6d. ;  Other  Countries,  6s. ;  strictly  net. 
Contents. 

Aluminium  Compounds — China  Clay — Iron  Compounds — -Potassium  Compounds — Sodium 
Compounds — Ammonium  Hydrate — Acids — Chromium  Compounds — Tin  Compounds — Copper 
Compounds  —  Lead  Compounds  —  Zinc  Compounds  —  Manganese  Compounds  —  Arsenic 
Compounds — Antimony  Compounds — Calcium  Compounds — Barium  Compounds — Cadmium 
Compounds — Mercury  Compounds — Ultramarine  —  Cobalt  and  Carbon  Compounds — Oils 
—Index. 

STUDENTS'   MANUAL  OF  PAINTS,   COLOURS,   OILS 
AND  VARNISHES.     By  JOHN  FURNELL.     Crown  8vo.     12 
Illustrations.     96  pp.     1903.     Price  2s.  6d. ;  Abroad,  3s. ;  strictly  net. 
Contents. 

Plant  —  Chromes  —  Blues  —  Greens  —  Earth  Colours  —  Blacks  —  Reds  —  Lakes — Whites — • 
Painters'  Oils — Turpentine — Oil  Varnishes — Spirit  Varnishes — Liquid  Paints — Enamel  Paints. 


Varnishes  and  Drying  Oils. 

THE  MANUFACTURE  OF  VARNISHES,  OIL  RE- 
FINING  AND  BOILING,  AND  KINDRED  INDUS- 
TRIES. Translated  from  the  French  of  ACH.  LIVACHE, 
Ingenieur  Civil  des  Mines.  Greatly  Extended  and  Adapted  to 
English  Practice,  with  numerous  Original  Recipes  by  JOHN 
GEDDES  MC!NTOSH.  27  Illustrations.  400  pp.  Demy  8vo.  1899. 
Price  12s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  i3s.  6d. ;  Other  Countries,  15s.; 
strictly  net. 


Contents. 

Resins — Solvents  :  Natural,  Artificial,  Manufacture,  Storage,  Special  Use — Colouring: 
Principles,  Vegetable,  Coal  Tar,  Coloured  Resinates,  Coloured  Oleates  and  Linoleates — 
Gum  Running  :  Melting  Pots,  Mixing  Pans — Spirit  Varnish  Manufacture:  Cold  Solution  Plant, 
Mechanical  Agitators,  Storage  Plant — Manufacture,  Characteristics  and  Uses  of  the  Spirit 
Varnishes — -Manufacture  of  Varnish  Stains — Manufacture  of  Lacquers — Manufacture  of 
Spirit  Enamels — Analysis  of  Spirit  Varnishes — Physical  and  Chemical  Constants  of  Resins — 
Table  of  Solubility  of  Resins  in  different  Menstrua — Systematic  qualitative  Analysis  of 
Resins,  Hirschop's  tables— Drying  Oils— Oil  Refining:  Processes— Oil  Boiling— Driers- 
Liquid  Driers  —  Solidified  Boiled  Oil  —  Manufacture  of  Linoleum  —  Manufacture  of 
India  Rubber  Substitutes — Printing  Ink  Manufacture— Lithographic  Ink  Manufacture — 
Manufacture  of  Oil  Varnishes — Running  and  Special  Treatment  of  Amber,  Copal,  Kauri, 
Manilla — Addition  of  Oil  to  Resin — Addition  of  Resin  to  Oil — Mixed  Processes — Solution  in 
Cold  of  previously  Fused  Resin — Dissolving  Resins  in  Oil,  etc.,  under  pressure — Filtration 
— Clarification — Storage — Ageing — Coachmakers*  Varnishes  and  Japans — Oak  Varnishes — 
Japanners'  Stoving  Varnishes — Japanners'  Gold  Size — Brunswick  Black — Various  Oil  Var- 
nishes— Oil-Varnish  Stains — Varnishes  for  "  Enamels  " — India  Rubber  Varnishes — Varnishes 
Analysis :  Processes,  Matching — Faults  in  Varnishes :  Cause,  Prevention — Experiments  and 
Exercises. 


DRYING  OILS,  BOILED  OIL  AND  SOLID  AND 
LIQUID  DRIERS.  By  L.  E.  ANDES.  Expressly  Written 
for  this  Series  of  Special  Technical  Books,  and  the  Publishers  hold 
the  Copyright  for  English  and  Foreign  Editions.  Forty-two  Illustra- 
tions. 342pp.  1901.  Demy  8vo.  Price  12s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies, 
13s.  6d. ;  Other  Countries,  15s. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Properties  of  the  Drying  Oils ;  Cause  of  the  Drying  Property ;  Absorption  of  Oxygen  ; 
Behaviour  towards  Metallic  Oxides,  etc. — The  Properties  of  and  Methods  for  obtaining  the 
Drying  Oils — Production  of  the  Drying  Oils  by  Expression  and  Extraction ;  Refining  and 
Bleaching;  Oil  Cakes  and  Meal;  The  Refining  and  Bleaching  of  the  Drying  Oils;  The 
Bleaching  of  Linseed  Oil— The  Manufacture  of  Boiled  Oil;  The  Preparation  of  Drying  Oils 
for  Use  in  the  Grinding  of  Paints  and  Artists'  Colours  and  in  the  Manufacture  of  Varnishes 
by  Heating  over  a  Fire  or  by  Steam,  by  the  Cold  Process,  by  the  Action  of  Air,  and  by  Means 
of  the  Electric  Current;  The  Driers  used  in  Boiling  Linseed  Oil;  The  Manufacture  of  Boiled 
Oil  and  the  Apparatus  therefor ;  Livache's  Process  for  Preparing  a  Good  Drying  Oil  and  its 
Practical  Application — The  Preparation  of  Varnishes  for  Letterpress,  Lithographic  and  Copper- 
plate Printing,  for  Oilcloth  and  Waterproof  Fabrics ;  The  Manufacture  of  Thickened  Linseed 
Oil,  Burnt  Oil,  Stand  Oil  by  Fire  Heat,  Superheated  Steam,  and  by  a  Current  of  Air— Behaviour 
of  the  Drying  Oils  and  Boiled  Oils  towards  Atmospheric  Influences,  Water,  Acids  and  Alkalies 
—Boiled  Oil  Substitutes— The  Manufacture  of  Solid  and  Liquid  Driers  from  Linseed  Oil  and 
Rosin ;  Linolic  Acid  Compounds  of  the  Driers — The  Adulteration  and  Examination  of  the 
Drying  Oils  and  Boiled  Oil. 


Oils,  Fats,  Soaps  and  Perfumes. 

LUBRICATING    OILS,    FATS    AND    GREASES:     Their 

Origin,  Preparation,  Properties,  Uses  and  Analyses.  A  Handbook  for 
Oil  Manufacturers,  Refiners  and  Merchants,  and  the  Oil  and  Fat 
Industry  in  General.  By  GEORGE  H.  HURST,  F.C.S.  Second  Revised 
and  Enlarged  Edition.  Sixty-five  Illustrations.  317  pp.  Demy  8vo. 
1902.  Price  10s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  11s. ;  Other  Countries.  12s 
strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Introductory— Hydrocarbon  Oils— Scotch  Shale  Oils— Petroleum— Vegetable  and 
Animal  Oils— Testing-  and  Adulteration  of  Oils— Lubricating:  Greases— Lubrication- 
Appendices— Index. 


TECHNOLOGY  OF  PETROLEUM  :  Oil  Fields  of  the 
World — Their  History,  Geography  and  Geology — Annual  Production 
and  Development — Oil-well  Drilling — Transport.  By  HENRY  NEU- 
BERGER  and  HENRY  NOALHAT.  Translated  from  the  French  by  J.  G. 
MclNTOSH.  550pp.  153  Illustrations.  26  Plates.  Super  Royal  8 vo.  1901. 
Price  21s.  ;  India  and  Colonies,  22s.  ;  Other  Countries,  23s.  6d.  ; 
strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Study  of  the  Petroliferous  Strata — Petroleum — Definition — The  Genesis  or  Origin  of 
Petroleum — The  Oil  Fields  of  Galicia,  their  History — Physical  Geography  and  Geology  of 
the  Galician  Oil  Fields — Practical  Notes  on  Galician  Land  Law — Economic  Hints  on  Working, 
etc.— Roumania— History,  Geography,  Geology— Petroleum  in  Russia— History— Russian 
Petroleum  (continued) — Geography  and  Geology  of  the  Caucasian  Oil  Fields — Russian  Petro- 
leum (continued) — The  Secondary  Oil  Fields  of  Europe,  Northern  Germany,  Alsace,  Italy,  etc. — 
Petroleum  in  France— Petroleum  in  Asia— Transcaspian  and  Turkestan  Territory— Turkestan 
— Persia — British  India  and  Burmah — British  Burmah  or  Lower  Burmah — China — Chinese 
Thibet — Japan,  Formosa  and  Saghalien — Petroleum  in  Oceania — Sumatra,  Java,  Borneo — 
Isle  of  Timor— Philippine  Isles— New  Zealand— The  United  States  of  America— History- 
Physical  Geology  and  Geography  of  the  United  States  Oil  Fields — Canadian  and  other  North 
American  Oil  Fields— Economic  Data  of  Work  in  North  America— Petroleum  in  the  West 
Indies  and  South  America — Petroleum  in  the  French  Colonies. 

Excavations — Hand  Excavation  or  Hand  Digging  of  Oil  Wells. 

Methods  of  Boring. 

Accidents — Boring  Accidents — Methods  of  preventing  them — Methods  of  remedying  them 
—Explosives  and  the  use  of  the  "  Torpedo  "  Levigation— Storing  and  Transport  of  Petroleum 
— General  Advice — Prospecting,  Management  and  carrying  on  of  Petroleum  Boring  Operations. 

General  Data— Customary  Formulae— Memento.  Practical  Part.  General  Data 
bearing  on  Petroleum— Glossary  of  Technical  Terms  used  in  the  Petroleum  Industry— Copious 
Index. 


THE    PRACTICAL    COMPOUNDING    OP   OILS,   TAL- 
LOW   AND    GREASE    FOR    LUBRICATION,    ETC. 

By  AN  EXPERT  OIL  REFINER.    100  pp.    1898.    Demy  8vo.    Price  7s.  6d. ; 
India  and  Colonies,  8s. ;  Other  Countries,  8s.  6d. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Introductory  Remarks  on  the  General  Nomenclature  of  Oils,  Tallow  and  Greases 
suitable  for  Lubrication  —  Hydrocarbon  Oils  — Animal  and  Fish  Oils  — Compound 
Oils— Vegetable  Oils— Lamp  Oils— Engine  Tallow,  Solidified  Oils  and  Petroleum 
Jelly  — Machinery  Greases:  Loco  and  Anti=friction— Clarifying  and  Utilisation 
of  Waste  Fats,  Oils,  Tank  Bottoms,  Drainings  of  Barrels  and  Drums,  Pickings 
Up,  Dregs,  etc.— The  Fixing  and  Cleaning  of  Oil  Tanks,  etc.— Appendix  and 
General  Information. 


ANIMAL  FATS  AND  OILS:  Their  Practical  Production, 
Purification  and  Uses  for  a  great  Variety  of  Purposes.  Their  Pro- 
perties, Falsification  and  Examination.  Translated  from  the  German 
of  Louis  EDGAR.  ANDES.  Sixty-two  Illustrations.  240  pp.  1898. 
Demy  8vo.  Price  10s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  11s. ;  Other  Countries,. 
12s. ;  strictly  net. 

IContents. 

Introduction— Occurrence,  Origin,  Properties  and  Chemical  Constitution  of  Animal  Fats- 
Preparation -of  Animal  Fats  and  Oils — Machinery — Tallow-melting  Plant — Extraction  Plant 
— Presses — Filtering  Apparatus — Butter:  Raw  Material  and  Preparation,  Properties,  Adul- 
terations, Beef  Lard  or  Remelted  Butter;  Testing— Candle-fish  Oil— Mutton-Tallow— Hare 
Fat—Goose  Fat— Neatsfpot  Oil— Bone  Fat:  Bone  Boiling,  Steaming  Bones,  Extraction, 
Refining — Bone  Oil — Artificial  Butter:  Oleomargarine,  Margarine  Manufacture  in  France, 
Grasso's  Process,  "  Kaiser's  Butter,"  Jahr  &  Miinzberg's  Method,  Filbert's  Process,  Winter's 
Method— Human  Fat— Horse  Fat— Beef  Marrow— Turtle  Oil— Hog's  Lard:  Raw  Material- 
Preparation,  Properties,  Adulterations,  Examination— Lard  Oil— Fish  Oils  — Liver  Oils- 
Artificial  Train  Oil— Wool  Fat:  Properties,  Purified  Wool  Fat— Spermaceti :  Examination, 
of  Fats  and  Oils  in  General. 


THE  OIL  MERCHANTS'  MANUAL  AND  OIL  TRADE 
READY  RECKONER.  Compiled  by  FRANK  P.  SHERRIFF. 
Second  Edition  Revised  and  Enlarged.  Demy  8vo.  214  pp.  1904. 
With  Two  Sheets  of  Tables.  Price  7s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  8s.  ; 
Other  Countries,  8s.  6d.  ;  strictly  net. 
Contents. 

Trade  Terms  and  Customs — Tables  to  Ascertain  Value  of  Oil  sold  per  cwt.  or  ton — Specific 
Gravity  Tables — Percentage  Tare  Tables — Petroleum  Tables — Paraffine  and  Benzoline  Calcu- 
lations— Customary  Drafts — Tables  for  Calculating  Allowance  for  Dirt,  Water,  etc. — Capacity 
of  Circular  Tanks  Tables,  etc.,  etc. 

THE  CHEMISTRY  OP  ESSENTIAL  OILS  AND  ARTI- 
FICIAL PERFUMES.  By  ERNEST  J.  PARRY,  B.Sc. 
(Lond.),  F.I.C.,  F.C.S.  411  pp.  20  Illustrations.  1899.  Demy  8vo. 
Price  12s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  13s.  6d. ;  Other  Countries,  15s.; 
strictly  net. 

Contents. 
The  General  Properties  of  Essential  Oils— Compounds  occurring  in  Essential  Oils 

—The   Preparation  of  Essential  Oils— The  Analysis  of  Essential  Oils— Systematic 

Study  of  the  Essential  Oils— Terpeneless  Oils— The  Chemistry  of  Artificial  Perfumes 

—Appendix :  Table  of  Constants— Index. 

VEGETABLE  FATS  AND  OILS :  Their  Practical  Prepara- 
tion, Purification  and  Employment  for  Various  Purposes,  their  Proper- 
ties, Adulteration  and  Examination.  Translated  from  the  German  of 
Louis  EDGAR  ANDES.  Ninety-four  Illustrations.  340  pp.  Second 
Edition.  1902.  Demy  8vo.  Price  10s.  6d.  ;  India  and  Colonies, 
11s.;  Other  Countries,  12s.;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

General  Properties— Estimation  of  the  Amount  of  Oil  in  Seeds— The  Preparation 
of, Vegetable  Fats  and  Oils— Apparatus  for  Grinding  Oil  Seeds  and  Fruits— Installation 
of  Oil  and  Fat  Works— Extraction  Method  of  Obtaining  Oils  and  Fats— Oil  Extraction 
Installations— Press  Moulds— Non-drying  Vegetable  Oils— Vegetable  drying  Oils- 
Solid  Vegetable  Fats— Fruits  Yielding  Oils  and  Fats— Wool-softening  Oils— Soluble  Oils- 
Treatment  of  the  Oil  after  Leaving  the  Press — Improved  Methods  of  Refining — Bleaching 
Fats  and  Oils— Practical  Experiments  on  the  Treatment  of  Oils  with  regard  to  Refining  and 
Bleaching— Testing  Oils  and  Fats. 

SOAPS.  A  Practical  Manual  of  the  Manufacture  of  Domestic, 
Toilet  and  other  Soaps.  By  GEORGE  H.  HURST,  F.C.S.  390  pp. 
66  Illustrations.  1898.  Price  12s.  6d.  ;  India  and  Colonies,  13s.  6d. ; 
Other  Countries,  15s. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Introductory— Soap-maker's  Alkalies— Soap  Fats  and  Oils— Perfumes— Water  as 
a  Soap  Material — Soap  Machinery — Technology  of  Soap-making — Glycerine  in  Soap 
Lyes— Laying  out  a  Soap  Factory— Soap  Analysis— Appendices. 


Textile  Soaps. 


TEXTILE  SOAPS  AND  OILS.  Handbook  on  the  Prepara- 
tion, Properties  and  Analysis  of  the  Soaps  and  Oils  used  in  Textile 
Manufacturing,  Dyeing  and  Printing.  By  GEORGE  H.  HURST,  F.C.S. 
Crown  8vo.  195  pp.  1904.  Price  5s. ;  India  and  Colonies,  5s.  6d. ; 
Other  Countries,  6s. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Methods  of  Making  Soaps— Hard  Soap— Soft  Soap.  Special  Textile  Soaps— Wool 
Soaps— Calico  Printers'  Soaps— Dyers'  Soaps.  Relation  of  Soap  to  Water  for  Industrial 
Purposes — Treating  Waste  Soap  Liquors — Boiled  Off  Liquor — Calico  Printers  and  Dyers' 
Soap  Liquors — Soap  Analysis— Fat  in  Soap. 

ANIMAL    AND    VEGETABLE    OILS    AND     FATS— Tallow— Lard— Bone    Grease- 
Tallow  Oil.    Vegetable  Soap,  Oils  and  Fats— Palm  Oil— Coco-nut  Oil— Olive  Oil— Cotton- 
seed  Oil— Linseed  Oil— Castor  Oil— Corn  Oil— Whale  Oil  or  Train  Oil— Repe  Oil. 
GLYCERINE. 

TEXTILE  OILS— Oleic  Acid— Blended  Wool  Oils— Oils  for  Cotton  Dyeing,  Printing  and 
Finishing— Turkey  Red  Oil— Alizarine  Oil— Oleine— Oxy  Turkey  Red  Oils— Soluble  Oil- 
Analysis  of  Turkey  Red  Oil — Finisher's  Soluble  Oil — Finisher's  Soap  Softening — Testing  and 
.Adulteration  of  Oils— Index. 


Cosmetical   Preparations. 

COSMETICS  :  MANUFACTURE,  EMPLOYMENT 
AND  TESTING  OP  ALL  COSMETIC  MATERIALS 
AND  COSMETIC  SPECIALITIES.  Translated 
from  the  German  of  Dr.  THEODOR  ROLLER.  Crown  8vo.  262  pp. 
1902.  Price  5s.;  India  and  Colonies,  5s.  6d. ;  Other  Countries, 
6s.  net. 

Contents. 

Purposes  and  Uses  of,  and  Ingredients  used  in  the^Preparation  of  Cosmetics — Preparation  of 
Perfumes  by  Pressure,  Distillation,  Maceration,  Absorption  or  Enfleurage,  and  Extraction 
Methods — Chemical  and  Animal  Products  used  in  the  Preparation  of  Cosmetics — Oils  and  Fats 
used  'in  the  Preparation  of  Cosmetics — General  Cosmetic  Preparations — Mouth  Washes  and 
Tooth  Pastes — Hair  Dyes,  Hair  Restorers  and  Depilatories — Cosmetic  Adjuncts  and 
Specialities — Colouring  Cosmetic  Preparations — Antiseptic  Washes  and  Soaps— Toilet  and 
Hygienic  Soaps — Secret  Preparations  for  Skin,  Complexion,  Teeth,  Mouth,  etc. — Testing  and 
Examining  the  Materials  Employed  in  the  Manufacture  of  Cosmetics — Index. 

Glue,     Bone     Products     and 
Manures. 

GLUE  AND  GLUE  TESTING.     By  SAMUEL  RIDEAL,  D.Sc. 
(Lond.),  F.I.C.    Fourteen  Engravings.    144pp.    DemySvo.    1900.    Price 
10s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  11s.;  Other  Countries,  12s.;  strictly  net. 
Contents. 

Constitution  and  Properties:  Definitions  and  Sources,  Gelatine,  Chondrin  and  Allied 
Bodies,  Physical  and  Chemical  Properties,  Classification,  Grades  and  Commercial  Varieties 
—Raw  Materials  and  Manufacture  :  Glue  Stock,  Lining,  Extraction,  Washing  and  Clari- 
fying, Filter  Presses,  Water  Supply,  Use  of  Alkalies,  Action  of  Bacteria  and  of  Antiseptics, 
Various  Processes,  Cleansing,  Forming,  Drying,  Crushing,  etc.,  Secondary  Products — Uses 
of  Glue :  Selection  and  Preparation  for  Use,  Carpentry,  Veneering,  Paper-Making,  Book- 
binding, Printing  Rollers,  Hectographs,  Match  Manufacture,  Sandpaper,  etc.,  Substitutes  for 
other  Materials,  Artificial  Leather  and  Caoutchouc — Gelatine :  General  Characters,  Liquid 
Gelatine,  Photographic  Uses,  Size,  Tanno-,  Chrome  and  Formo-Gelatine,  Artificial  Silk, 
Cements,  Pneumatic  Tyres,  Culinary,  Meat  Extracts,  Isinglass,  Medicinal  and  other  Uses, 
Bacteriology— Glue  Testing:  Review  of  Processes,  Chemical  Examination,  Adulteration, 
Physical  Tests,  Valuation  of  Raw  Materials — Commercial  Aspects. 

BONE  PRODUCTS  AND  MANURES  :  An  Account  of  the 
most  recent  Improvements  in  the  Manufacture  of  Fat,  Glue,  Animal 
Charcoal,  Size,  Gelatine  and  Manures.  By  THOMAS  LAMBERT,  Techni- 
cal and  Consulting  Chemist.  Illustrated  by  Twenty-one  Plans  and 
Diagrams.  162  pp.  Demy  8vo.  1901.  Price  7s.  6d. ;  India  and 
Colonies,  8s.  ;  Other  Countries,  8s.  6d.  ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Chemical  Composition  of  Bones — Arrangement  of  Factory — Properties  of  Glue — Glutin 
and  Chondrin — Skin  Glue — Liming  of  Skins — Washing — Boiling  of  Skins — Clarification  of  Glue 
Liquors — Glue-Boiling  and  Clarifying-House — Specification  of  a  Glue — Size — Uses  and  Pre- 
paration and  Composition  of  Size — Concentrated  Size — Properties  of  Gelatine — Preparation 
of  Skin  Gelatine — Drying — Bone  Gelatine — Selecting  Bones — Crushing — Dissolving — Bleaching 
— Boiling — Properties  of  Glutin  and  Chondrin — Testing  of  Glues  and  Gelatines — The  Uses  of 
Glue,  Gelatine  and  Size  in  Various  Trades — Soluble  and  Liquid  Glues — Steam  and  Waterproof 
Glues — Manures — Importation  of  Food  Stuffs — Soils — Germination — Plant  Life — Natural 
Manures — Water  and  Nitrogen  in  Farmyard  Manure — Full  Analysis  of  Farmyard  Manure 
—Action  on  Crops— Water-Closet  System— Sewage  Manure— Green  Manures— Artificial 
Manures — Mineral  Manures — Nitrogenous  Matters — Shoddy — Hoofs  and  Horns — Leather 
Waste — Dried  Meat — Dried  Blood — Superphosphates — Composition — Manufacture — Common 
Raw  Bones — Degreased  Bones — Crude  Fat — Refined  Fat — Degelatinised  Bones — Animal 
Charcoal — Bone  Superphosphates — Guanos — Dried  Animal  Products — Potash  Compounds — 
Sulphate  of  Ammonia — Extraction  in  Vacuo — French  and  British  Gelatines  compared — Index. 


Chemicals,  Waste  Products  and 
Agricultural  Chemistry. 

REISSUE  OF  CHEMICAL  ESSAYS  OP  C.  W. 
SCHEELE.  First  Published  in  English  in  1786.  Trans- 
lated from  the  Academy  of  Sciences  at  Stockholm,  with  Additions.  300 
pp.  Demy  8vo.  1901.  Price  5s. ;  India  and  Colonies,  5s.  6d. ;  Other 
Countries,  6s. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Memoir :  C.  W.  Scheele  and  his  work  (written  for  this  edition  by  J.  G.  Mclntosh) — On 
Fluor  Mineral  and  its'  Acid — On  Fluor  Mineral — Chemical  Investigation  of  Fluor  Acid, 
with  a  View  to  the  Earth  which  it  Yields,  by  Mr.  Wiegler — Additional  Information 
Concerning  Fluor  Minerals — On  Manganese,  Magnesium,  or  Magnesia  Vitrariorum  —  On 
Arsenic  and  its  Acid — Remarks  upon  Salts  of  Benzoin — On  Silex,  Clay  and  Alum — Analysis 
of  the  Calculus  Vesical — Method  of  Preparing  Mercurius  Dulcis  Via  Humida — Cheaper  and 
more  Convenient  Method  of  Preparing  Pulvis  Algarothi — Experiments  upon  Molybdsena 
— Experiments  on  Plumbago — Method  of  Preparing  a  New  Green  Colour — Of  the  De- 
composition of  Neutral  Salts  by  Unslaked  Lime  and  Iron — On  the  Quantity  of  Pure  Air  which 
is  Daily  Present  in  our  Atmosphere — On  Milk  and  its  Acid — On  the  Acid  of  Saccharum  Lactis 
— On  the  Constituent  Parts  of  Lapis  Ponderosus  or  Tungsten — Experiments  and  Observations 
on  Ether — Index. 

THE  MANUFACTURE  OF  ALUM  AND  THE  SUL- 
PHATES AND  OTHER  SALTS  OF  ALUMINA  AND 
IRON.  Their  Uses  and  Applications  as  Mordants  in  Dyeing 
and  Calico  Printing,  and  their  other  Applications  in  the  Arts,  Manufac- 
tures, Sanitary  Engineering,  Agriculture  and  Horticulture.  Translated 
from  the  French  of  LUCIEN  GESCHWIND.  195  Illustrations.  400  pp. 
Royal  8vo.  1901.  Price  12s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  13s.  6d. ;  Other 
Countries,  15s.  ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Theoretical  Study  of  Aluminium,  Iron,  and  Compounds  of  these  Metals- 
Aluminium  and  its  Compounds — Iron  and  Iron  Compounds. 

Manufacture  of  Aluminium  Sulphates  and  Sulphates  of  Iron— Manufacture  of 
Aluminium  Sulphate  and  the  Alums — Manufacture  of  Sulphates  of  Iron. 

Uses  of  the  Sulphates  of  Aluminium  and  Iron — Uses  of  Aluminium  Sulphate  and 
Alums — Application  to  Wool  and  Silk — Preparing  and  using  Aluminium  Acetates — Employment 
of  Aluminium  Sulphate  in  Carbonising  Wool — The  Manufacture  of  Lake  Pigments — Manu- 
facture of  Prussian  Blue — Hide  and  Leather  Industry — Paper  Making — Hardening  Plaster — 
Lime  Washes — Preparation  of  Non-inflammable  Wood,  etc. — Purification  of  Waste  Waters 
—Uses  and  Applications  of  Ferrous  Sulphate  and  Ferric  Sulphates— Dyeing— Manu- 
facture of  Pigments — Writing  Inks — Purification  of  Lighting  Gas  — Agriculture — Cotton  Dyeing 
— Disinfectant — Purifying  Waste  Liquors — Manufacture  of  Nordhausen  Sulphuric  Acid — 
Fertilising. 

Chemical  Characteristics  of  Iron  and  Aluminium — Analysis  of  Various  Aluminous 
or  Ferruginous  Products  — Aluminium  — Analysing  Aluminium  Products  — Alunite 
Alumina — Sodium  Aluminate — Aluminium  Sulphate — Iron — Analytical  Characteristics  of  Iron 
Salts — Analysis  of  Pyritic  Lignite — Ferrous  and  Ferric  Sulphates — Rouil  Mordant — Index. 

AMMONIA  AND  ITS  COMPOUNDS  :  Their  Manufacture 
and  Uses.  By  CAMILLE  VINCENT,  Professor  at  the  Central  School  of 
Arts  and  Manufactures,  Paris.  Translated  from  the  French  by  M.  J. 
SALTER.  Royal  8vo.  114pp.  1901.  Thirty-two  Illustrations.  Price 
5s. ;  India  and  Colonies,  5s.  6d. ;  Other  Countries,  6s. ;  strictly  net. 
Contents. 

General  Considerations:  Various  Sources  of  Ammoniacal  Products;  Human  Urine 
as  a  Source  of  Ammonia— Extraction  of  Ammoniacal  Products  from  Sewage- 
Extraction  of  Ammonia  from  Gas  Liquor — Manufacture  of  Ammoniacal  Com- 
pounds from  Bones,  Nitrogenous  Waste,  Beetroot  Wash  and  Peat— Manufacture  of 
Caustic  Ammonia,  and  Ammonium  Chloride,  Phosphate  and  Carbonate— Recovery 
of:Ammonia  from  the  Ammonia-Soda  Mother  Liquors— Index. 


10 

ANALYSIS  OP  RESINS  AND  BALSAMS.  Translated 
from  the  German  of  Dr.  KARL  DIETERICH.  Demy  8vo.  340  pp.  1901. 
Price  7s.  6d.  ;  India  and  Colonies,  8s.  ;  Other  Countries,  8s.  6d. ; 
strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Definition  of  Resins  in  General— Definition  of  Balsams,  and  especially  the  Gum  Resins- 
External  and  Superficial  Characteristics  of  Resinous  Bodies — Distinction  between  Resinous 
Bodies  and  Fats  and  Oils — Origin,  Occurrence  and  Collection  of  Resinous  Substances — 
Classification — Chemical  Constituents  of  Resinous  Substances — Resinols — Resinot  Annols — 
Behaviour  of  Resin  Constituents  towards  the  Cholesterine  Reactions — Uses  and  Identi- 
fication of  Resins— Melting-point— Solvents— Acid  Value— Saponification  Value— Resin  Value 
— Ester  and  Ether  Values— Acetyl  and  Corbonyl  Value — Methyl  Value — Resin  Acid—  Syste- 
matic Resume  of  the  Performance  of  the  Acid  and  Saponification  Value  Tests. 

Balsams  —  Introduction  —  Definitions — Canada  Balsam — Copaiba  Balsam  —  Angostura 
Copaiba  Balsam  —  Babia  Copaiba  Balsam  —  Carthagena  Copaiba  Balsam  —  Maracaiba 
Copaiba  Balsam — Maturin  Copaiba  Balsam — Gurjum  Copaiba  Balsam — Para  Copaiba  Balsam 
— Surinam  Copaiba  Balsam — West  African  Copaiba  Balsam — Mecca  Balsam — Peruvian 
Balsam— Tolu  Balsam— Acaroid  Resin— Amine— Amber— African  and  West  Indian  Kino- 
Bengal  Kino — Labdanum — Mastic — Pine  Resin — Sandarach — Scammonium — Shellac — Storax 
—Adulteration  of  Styrax  Liquidus  Crudus— Purified  Storax— Styrax  Crudus  Colatus— Taca- 
mahac — Thapsia  Resin  —  Turpentine — Chios  Turpentine  —  Strassburg  Turpentine — Turpeth 
Turpentine.  Gum  Resins — Ammoniacum — Bdellium — Euphorbium  —  Galbanum — Gamboge 
— Lactucarium — Myrrh — Opopanax — Sagapenum — Olibanum  or  Incense — Acaroid  Resin — 
Amber — Thapsia  Resin — Index. 


MANUAL  OF  AGRICULTURAL  CHEMISTRY.   By 

HERBERT  INGLE,  F.I.C.,  Lecturer  on  Agricultural  Chemistry,  the 
Yorkshire  College;  Lecturer  in  the  Victoria  University.  388  pp.  11 
Illustrations.  1902.  Demy  8vo.  Price  7s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  8s. ; 
Other  Countries,  8s.  6d.  net. 

Contents. 

Introduction — The  Atmosphere — The  Soil — The  Reactions  occurring  in  Soils — The 
Analysis  of  Soils — Manures,  Natural — Manures  (continued) — The  Analysis  of  Manures — The 
Constituents  of  Plants— The  Plant— Crops -The  Animal— Foods  and  Feeding— Milk  and  Milk 
Products — The  Analysis  of  Milk  and  Milk  Products — Miscellaneous  Products  used  in  Agri- 
culture— Appendix — Index. 


THE  UTILISATION  OF  WASTE  PRODUCTS.     A  Treatise 

on  the  Rational  Utilisation,  Recovery  and  Treatment  of  Waste  Pro- 
ducts of  all  kinds.  By  Dr.  THEODOR  HOLLER.  Translated  from  the 
Second  Revised  German  Edition.  Twenty-two  Illustrations.  Demy 
8vo.  280  pp.  1902.  Price  7s.  6d.  ;  India  and  Colonies,  8s.  ;  Other 
Countries,  8s.  6d. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

The  Waste  of  Towns — Ammonia  and  Sal-Ammoniac — Rational  Processes  for  Obtaining 
these  Substances  by  Treating  Residues  and  Waste — Residues  in  the  Manufacture  of  Aniline 
Dyes — Amber  Waste — Brewers'  Waste — Blood  and  Slaughter-House  Refuse — Manufactured 
Fuels — Waste  Paper  and  Bookbinders'  Waste — Iron  Slags — Excrement — Colouring  Matters 
from  Waste — Dyers'  Waste  Waters — Fat  from  Waste — Fish  Waste — Calamine  Sludge — 
Tannery  Waste — Gold  and  Silver  Waste — India-rubber  and  Caoutchouc  Waste — Residues  in 
the  Manufacture  of  Rosin  Oil — Wood  Waste— Horn  Waste — Infusorial  Earth — Iridium  from 
Goldsmiths'  Sweepings— Jute  Waste— Cork  Waste— Leather  Waste— Glue  Makers'  Waste 
— Illuminating  Gas  from  Waste  and  the  By-Products  of  the  Manufacture  of  Coal  Gas — 
Meerschum — Molasses — Metal  Waste — By-Products  in  the  Manufacture  of  Mineral  Waters 
—Fruit— The  By-Products  of  Paper  and  Paper  Pulp  Works— By-Products  in  the  Treatment 
of  Coal  Tar  Oils — Fur  Waste — The  Waste  Matter  in  the  Manufacture  of  Parchment  Paper 
— Mother  of  Pearl  Waste — Petroleum  Residues — Platinum  Residues — Broken  Porcelain. 
Earthenware  and  Glass— Salt  Waste— Slate  Waste— Sulphur— Burnt  Pyrites— Silk  Waste- 
Soap  Makers'  Waste — Alkali  Waste  and  the  Recovery  of  Soda — Waste  Produced  in  Grinding 
Mirrors— Waste  Products  in  the  Manufacture  of  Starch— Stearic  Acid— Vegetable  Ivory 
Waste— Turf— Waste  Waters  of  Cloth  Factories— Wine  Residues— Tinplate  Waste— Wool 
Waste — Wool  Sweat — The  Waste  Liquids  from  Sugar  Works — Index. 


11 
Writing  Inks  and  Sealing  Waxes. 

INK  MANUFACTURE  :  Including  Writing,  Copying,  Litho- 
graphic, Marking,  Stamping,  and  Laundry  Inks.  By  SIGMUND  LEHNER. 
Three  Illustrations.  Crown  8vo.  162  pp.  1902.  Translated  from  the 
German  of  the  Fifth  Edition.  Price  5s. ;  India  and  Colonies,  5s.  6d. ; 
Other  Countries,  6s. ;  net. 

Contents. 

Varieties  of  Ink— Writing  Inks— Raw  Materials  of  Tannin  Inks— The  Chemical  Constitution 
of  the  Tannin  Inks — Recipes  for  Tannin  Inks — Logwood  Tannin  Inks — Ferric  Inks — Alizarine 
Inks— Extract  Inks— Logwood  Inks— Copying  Inks— Hektographs— Hektograph  Inks— Safety 
Inks — Ink  Extracts  and  Powders — Preserving  Inks — Changes  in  Ink  and  the  Restoration  of 
Faded  Writing— Coloured  Inks— Red  Inks— Blue  Inks— Violet  Inks— Yellow  Inks— Green 
Inks— Metallic  Inks— Indian  Ink— Lithographic  Inks  and  Pencils— Ink  Pencils— Marking  Inks 
— Ink  Specialities — Sympathetic  Inks — Stamping  Inks — Laundry  or  Washing  Blue — Index 

SEALING-WAXES,  WAFERS  AND  OTHER  ADHES- 
IVES  FOR  THE  HOUSEHOLD,  OFFICE,  WORK- 
SHOP AND  FACTORY.  By  H.  C.  STANDAGE.  Crown 
8vo.  96  pp.  1902.  Price  5s.  ;  India  and  Colonies,  5s.  6d. ;  Other 
Countries,  6s. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Materials  Used  for  Making  Sealing- Waxes— The  Manufacture  of  Sealing-Waxes— 
Wafers— Notes  on  the  Nature  of  the  Materials  Used  in  Making  Adhesive  Compounds— Cements 
for  Use  in  the  Household — Office  Gums,  Pastes  and  Mucilages — Adhesive  Compounds  for 
Factory  and  Workshop  Use. 

Lead  Ores  and  Compounds. 

LEAD  AND  ITS  COMPOUNDS.  By  THOS.  LAMBERT, 
Technical' and  Consulting  Chemist.  Demy  8vo.  226pp.  Forty  Illus- 
trations. 1902.  Price  7s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  8s. ;  Other  Countries, 
8s.  6d. ;  net.  Plans  and  Diagrams. 

Contents. 

History — Ores  of  Lead — Geographical  Distribution  of  the  Lead  Industry — Chemical  and 
Physical  Properties  of  Lead— Alloys  of  Lead— Compounds  of  Lead— Dressing  of  Lead  Ores 
— Smelting  of  Lead  Ores — Smelting  in  the  Scotch  or  American  Ore-hearth — Smelting  in  the 
Shaft  or  Blast  Furnace — Condensation  of  Lead  Fume — Desilverisation,  or  the  Separation 
of  Silver  from  Argentiferous  Lead — Cupellation — The  Manufacture  of  Lead  Pipes  and 
Sheets — Protoxide  of  Lead — Litharge  and  Massicot — Red  Lead  or  Minium — Lead  Poisoning 
— Lead  Substitutes — Zinc  and  its  Compounds — Pumice  Stone — Drying  Oils  and  Siccatives 
— Oil  of  Turpentine  Resin — Classification  of  Mineral  Pigments — Analysis  of  Raw  and  Finished 
Products— Tables— Index. 

NOTES  ON  LEAD  ORES  :  Their  Distribution  and  Properties. 
By  JAS.  FAIRIE,  F.G.S.  Crown  8vo.  1901.  64  pages.  Price  2s.  6d. ; 
Abroad,  3s. ;  strictly  net. 

Industrial  Hygiene. 

THE  RISKS  AND  DANGERS  TO  HEALTH  OF  VARI- 
OUS OCCUPATIONS  AND  THEIR  PREVENTION. 

By  LEONARD  A.  PARRY,  M.D.,  B.S.  (Lond.).  196  pp.  Demy  8vo.  1900. 
Price  7s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  8s. ;  Other  Countries,  8s.  6d. ;  strictly 
net. 

Contents. 

Occupations  which  are  Accompanied  by  the  Generation  and  Scattering  of  Abnormal 
•Quantities  of  Dust — Trades  in  which  there  is  Danger  of  Metallic  Poisoning— Certain  Chemi- 
cal Trades — Some  Miscellaneous  Occupations — Trades  in  which  Various  Poisonous  Vapours 
are  Inhaled — General  Hygienic  Considerations — Index. 


12 

Industrial  Uses  of  Air,  Steam  and 

Water. 

DRYING  BY  MEANS  OF  AIR  AND  STEAM.  Explana- 
tions, Formulae,  and  Tables  for  Use  in  Practice.  Translated  from  the 
German  of  E.  HAUSBRAND.  Two  folding  Diagrams  and  Thirteen  Tables. 
Crown  8vo.  1901.  72  pp.  Price  5s.  ;  India  and  Colonies,  5s.  6d.  ; 
Other  Countries,  6s. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

British  and  Metric  Systems  Compared — Centigrade  and  Fahr.  Thermometers — Estimation 
of  the  Maximum  Weight  of  Saturated  Aqueous  Vapour  which  can  be  contained  in  1  kilo, 
of  Air  at  Different  Pressure  and  Temperatures — Calculation  of  the  Necessary  Weight  and 
Volume  of  Air,  and  of  the  Least  Expenditure  of  Heat,  per  Drying  Apparatus  with  Heated 
Air,  at  the  Atmospheric  Pressure :  A ,  With  the  Assumption  that  the  Air  is  Completely  Satur- 
ated with  Vapour  both  before  Entry  and  after  Exit  from  the  Apparatus — B,  When  the 
Atmospheric  Air  is  Completely  Saturated  before  entry,  but  at  its  exit  is  only  f ,  J  or  \  Saturated 
— C,  When  the  Atmospheric  Air  is  not  Saturated  with  Moisture  before  Entering  the  Drying 
Apparatus— Drying  Apparatus,  in  which,  in  the  Drying  Chamber,  a  Pressure  is  Artificially 
Created,  Higher  or  Lower  than  that  of  the  Atmosphere — Drying  by  Means  of  Superheated 
Steam,  without  Air— Heating  Surface,  Velocity  of  the  Air  Current,  Dimensions  of  the  Drying 
Room,  Surface  of  the  Drying  Material,  Losses  of  Heat — Index. 

(See  also  "  Evaporating,  Condensing  and  Cooling  Apparatus,"  p.  27.) 

PURE  AIR,  OZONE  AND  WATER.  A  Practical  Treatise 
of  their  Utilisation  and  Value  in  Oil,  Grease,  Soap,  Paint,  Glue  and 
other  Industries.  By  W.  B.  COWELL.  Twelve  Illustrations.  Crown 
8vo.  85  pp.  1900.  Price  5s.;  India  and  Colonies,  5s.  6d.  ;;  Other 
Countries,  6s. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Atmospheric  Air ;  Lifting  of  Liquids  ;  Suction  Process ;  Preparing  Blown  Oils ;  Preparing 
Siccative  Drying  Oils — Compressed  Air;  Whitewash — Liquid  Air;  Retrocession — Purification 
of  Water;  Water  Hardness— Fleshings  and  Bones— Ozonised  Air  in  the  Bleaching  and  De- 
odorising of  Fats,  Glues,  etc. ;  Bleaching  Textile  Fibres — Appendix:  Air  and  Gases;  Pressure 
of  Air  at  Various  Temperatures ;  Fuel ;  Table  of  Combustibles ;  Saving  of  Fuel  by  Heating 
Feed  Water;  Table  of  Solubilities  of  Scale  Making  Minerals;  British  Thermal  Units  Tables  ; 
Volume  of  the  Flow  of  Steam  into  the  Atmosphere;  Temperature  of  Steam — Index. 

THE  INDUSTRIAL  USES  OP  WATER.  COMPOSI- 
TION —  EFFECTS— TROUBLES  —  REMEDIES— RE- 
SIDUARY WATERS— PURIFICATION— ANALYSIS. 

By  H.  DE  LA  Coux.  Royal  8vo.  Translated  from  the  French  and 
Revised  by  ARTHUR  MORRIS.  364  pp.  135  Illustrations.  1903.  Price 
10s.  6d. ;  Colonies,  11s. ;  Other  Countries,  12s. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Chemical  Action  of  Water  in  Nature  and  in  Industrial  Use — Composition  of  Waters — 
Solubility  of  Certain  Salts  in  Water  Considered  from  the  Industrial  Point  of  View— Effects  on 
the  Boiling  of  Water— Effects  of  Water  in  the  Industries— Difficulties  with  Water— Feed 
Water  for  Boilers— Water  in  Dyeworks,  Print  Works,  and  Bleach  Works— Water  in  the 
Textile  Industries  and  in  Conditioning — Water  in  Soap  Works — Water  in  Laundries  and 
Washhouses — Water  in  Tanning — Water  in  Preparing  Tannin  and  Dyewood  Extracts — Water 
in  Papermaking — Water  in  Photography — Water  in  Sugar  Refining — Water  in  Making  Ices 
and  Beverages— Water  in  Cider  Making— Water  in  Brewing— Water  in  Distilling— Preliminary 
Treatment  and  Apparatus — Substances  Used  for  Preliminary  Chemical  Purification — Com- 
mercial Specialities  and  their  Employment — Precipitation  of  Matters  in  Suspension  in  Water 
— Apparatus  for  the  Preliminary  Chemical  Purification  of  Water — Industrial  Filters — Indus- 
trial Sterilisation  of  Water — Residuary  Waters  and  their  Purification — Soil  Filtration — 
Purification  by  Chemical  Processes— Analyses— Index. 

(See  Books  on  Smoke  Prevention,  Engineering  and  Metallurgy,  p.  26,  etc.] 


13 


X  Rays. 


PRACTICAL  X  RAY  WORK.  By  FRANK  T.  ADDYMAN, 
B.Sc.  (Lond.),  F.I.C.,  Member  of  the  Roentgen  Society  of  London  ; 
Radiographer  to  St.  George's  Hospital ;  Demonstrator  of  Physics  and 
Chemistry,  and  Teacher  of  Radiography  in  St.  George's  Hospital 
Medical  School.  Demy  8vo.  Twelve  Plates  from  Photographs  of  X  Ray 
Work.  Fifty-two  Illustrations.  200pp.  1901.  Price  10s.  6d. ;  India 
and  Colonies,  11s. ;  Other  Countries,  12s. ;  strictly  net. 
Contents. 

Historical— Work  leading  up  to  the  Discovery  of  the  X  Rays— The  Discovery— Appara= 
tus  and  its  Management — Electrical  Terms — Sources  of  Electricity — Induction  Coils — 
Electrostatic  Machines— Tubes— Air  Pumps— Tube  Holders  and  Stereoscopic  Apparatus- 
Fluorescent  Screens— Practical  X  Ray  Work— Installations— Radioscopy— Radiography— 
X  Rays  in  Dentistry— X  Rays  in  Chemistry— X  Rays  in  War— Index. 

List  of  Plates. 

Frontispiece— Congenital  Dislocation  of  Hip- Joint.— I.,  Needle  in  Finger.— II.,  Needle  in 
Foot.— III.,  Revolver  Bullet  in  Calf  and  Leg.— IV.,  A  Method  of  Localisation.— V.,  Stellate 
Fracture  of  Patella  showing  shadow  of  "  Strapping  ".—VI.,  Sarcoma.— VII.,  Six-weeks-old 
Injury  to  Elbow  showing  new  Growth  of  Bone.— VIII.,  Old  Fracture  of  Tibia  and  Fibula 
badly  set. — IX.,  Heart  Shadow. — X.,  Fractured  Femur  showing  Grain  of  Splint. — XL,  Bar- 
rell's  Method  of  Localisation. 

India- Rubber  and  Gutta  Percha. 

INDIA-RUBBER  AND  GUTTA  PERCHA.  Translated 
from  the  French  of  T.  SEELIGMANN,  G.  LAMY  TORVILHON  and  H. 
FALCONNET  by  JOHN  GEDDES  MC!NTOSH.  Royal  8vo.  Eighty-six 
Illustrations.  Three  Plates.  412  pages.  1903.  Price  12s.  6d. ; 
India  and  Colonies,  13s.  6d. ;  Other  Countries,  15s. ;  strictly  net. 
Contents. 

India- Rubber — Botanical  Origin — Climatology — Soil — Rational  Culture  and  Acclimation 
of  the  Different  Species  of  India-Rubber  Plants— Methods  of  Obtaining  the  Latex— Methods 
of  Preparing  Raw  or  Crude  India-Rubber — Classification  of  the  Commercial  Species  of 
Raw  Rubber— Physical  and  Chemical  Properties  of  the  Latex  and  of  India-Rubber— 
Mechanical  Transformation  of  Natural  Caoutchouc  into  Washed  or  Normal  Caoutchouc 
(Purification)  and  Normal  Rubber  into  Masticated  Rubber— Softening,  Cutting,  Washing, 
Drying— Preliminary  Observations— Vulcanisation  of  Normal  Rubber— Chemical  and  Physical 
Properties  of  Vulcanised  Rubber — General  Considerations — Hardened  Rubber  or  Ebonite- 
Considerations  on  Mineralisation  and  other  Mixtures— Coloration  and  Dyeing— Analysis 
of  Natural  or  Normal  Rubber  and  Vulcanised  Rubber — Rubber  Substitutes — Imitation  Rubber, 

Gutta  Percha — Botanical  Origin — Climatology — Soil — Rational  Culture — Methods  of 
Collection— Classification  of  the  Different  Species  of  Commercial  Gutta  Percha— Physical 
and  Chemical  Properties — Mechanical  Transformation — Methods  of  Analysing — Gutta  Percha 
Substitutes — Index. 


Leather  Trades. 


PRACTICAL  TREATISE  ON  THE  LEATHER  IN- 
DUSTRY. By  A.  M.  VILLON.  Translated  by  FRANK  T. 
ADDYMAN,  B.Sc.  (Lond.),  F.I.C.,  F.C.S. ;  and  Corrected  by  an  Emi- 
nent Member  of  the  Trade.  500  pp.,  royal  8vo.  1901.  123  Illustra- 
tions. Price  21s. ;  India  and  Colonies,  22s. ;  Other  Countries,  23s.  6d. ; 
strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Preface — Translator's  Preface — List  of  Illustrations. 

Part  I.,  Materials  used  in  Tanning— Skins :  Skin  and  its  Structure;  Skins  used  in 
Tanning;  Various  Skins  and  their  Uses — Tannin  and  Tanning  Substances:  Tannin;  Barks 
(Oak);  Barks  other  than  Oak;  Tanning  Woods;  Tannin-bearing  Leaves;  Excrescences; 
Tan-bearing  Fruits;  Tan-bearing  Roots  and  Bulbs;  Tanning  Juices;  Tanning  Substances 
used  in  Various  Countries ;  Tannin  Extracts ;  Estimation  of  Tannin  and  Tannin  Principles. 

Part  II.,  Tanning; — The  Installation  of  a  Tannery:  Tan  Furnaces;  Chimneys,  Boilers, 
etc. ;  Steam  Engines — Grinding  and  Trituration  of  Tanning  Substances :  Cutting  up  Bark  ; 
Grinding  Bark;  The  Grinding  of  Tan  Woods;  Powdering  Fruit,  Galls  and  Grains;  Notes  on 


14 

the  Grinding  of  Bark  —  Manufacture  of  Sole  Leather  :  Soaking  ;  Sweating  and  Unhairing  ; 
Plumping  and  Colouring;  Handling;  Tanning;  Tanning  Elephants'  Hides;  Drying; 
Striking  or  Pinning  —  Manufacture  of  Dressing  Leather:  Soaking;  Depilation  ;  New  Pro- 
cesses for  the  Depilation  of  Skins;  Tanning;  Cow  Hides;  Horse  Hides;  Goat  Skins;  Manu- 
facture of  Split  Hides  —  On  Various  Methods  of  Tanning  :  Mechanical  Methods;  Physical 
Methods;  Chemical  Methods;  Tanning  with  Extracts  —  Quantity  and  Quality;  Quantity; 
Net  Cost;  Quality  of  Leather  —  Various  Manipulations  of  Tanned  Leather:  Second  Tanning; 
Grease  Stains;  Bleaching  Leather;  Waterproofing  Leather;  Weighting  Tanned  Leather; 
Preservation  of  Leather  —  Tanning  Various  Skins. 

Part  III.,  Currying  —  Waxed  Calf:  Preparation;  Shaving;  Stretching  or  Slicking; 
Oiling  the  Grain  ;  Oiling  the  Flesh  Side  ;  Whitening  and  Graining  ;  Waxing  ;  Finishing  ;  Dry 
Finishing;  Finishing  in  Colour;  Cost—  White  Calf:  Finishing  in  White—  Cow  Hide  for 
Upper  Leathers:  Black  Cow  Hide;  White  Cow  Hide;  Coloured  Cow  Hide—  Smooth  Cow 
Hide  —  Black  Leather  —  Miscellaneous  Hides:  Horse;  Goat;  Waxed  Goat  Skin;  Matt  Goat 
Skin  —  Russia  Leather:  Russia  Leather;  Artificial  Russia  Leather. 

Part  IV.,  Enamelled,  Hungary  and  Chamoy  Leather,  Morocco,  Parchment,  Furs 
and  Artificial  Leather—  Enamelled  Leather:  Varnish  Manufacture;  Application  of  the 
Enamel;  Enamelling  in  Colour  —  Hungary  Leather:  Preliminary;  Wet  Work  or  Prepara- 
tion; Aluming;  Dressing  or  Loft  Work;  Tallowing;  Hungary  Leather  from  Various  Hides 

—  Tawing:  Preparatory  Operations;  Dressing;  Dyeing  Tawed  Skins;  Rugs  —  Chamoy  Leather 

—  Morocco:  Preliminary  Operations,  Morocco  Tanning:   Mordants  used  in  Morocco  Manu- 


g ; 

and  Silvering:  Gilding;  Silvering;  Nickel  and  Cobalt  —  Parchment  —  Furs  and  Furriery: 
Preliminary  Remarks;  Indigenous  Furs;  Foreign  Furs  from  Hot  Countries;  Foreign  Furs 
from  Cold  Countries  ;  Furs  from  Birds'  Skins  ;  Preparation  of  Furs  ;  Dressing  ;  Colouring  ; 
Preparation  of  Birds'  Skins;  Preservation  of  Furs  —  Artificial  Leather:  Leather  made  from 
Scraps  ;  Compressed  Leather  ;  American  Cloth  ;  Papier  Mache  ;  Linoleum  ;  Artificial  Leather. 

Part  V.,  Leather  Testing  and  the  Theory  of  Tanning—  Testing  and  Analysis  of  Leather  : 
Physical  Testing  of  Tanned  Leather;  Chemical  Analysis  —  The  Theory  of  Tanning  and  the 
other  Operations  of  the  Leather  and  Skin  Industry:  Theory  of  Soaking;  Theory  of  Un- 
hairing; Theory  of  Swelling;  Theory  of  Handling;  Theory  of  Tanning;  Theory  of  the 
Action  of  Tannin  on  the  Skin;  Theory  of  Hungary  Leather  Making;  Theory  of  Tawing; 
Theory  of  Chamoy  Leather  Making;  Theory  of  Mineral  Tanning. 

Part  VI.,  Uses  of  Leather—  Machine  Belts:  Manufacture  of  Belting;  Leather  Chain 
Belts;  Various  Belts,  Use  of  Belts—  Boot  and  Shoe-making:  Boots  and  Shoes;  Laces- 
Saddlery  :  Composition  of  a  Saddle  ;  Construction  of  a  Saddle  —  Harness  :  The  Pack  Saddle  ; 
Harness  —  Military  Equipment  —  Glove  Making  —  Carriage  Building  —  Mechanical  Uses. 

Appendix,  The  World's  Commerce  in  Leather—  Europe  ;  America;  Asia;  Africa; 
Australasia  —  Index. 

THE  LEATHER  WORKER'S  MANUAL.  Being  a  Com- 
pendium of  Practical  Recipes  and  Working  Formulae  for  Curriers, 
Bootmakers,  Leather  Dressers,  Blacking  Manufacturers,  Saddlers, 
Fancy  Leather  Workers.  By  H.  C.  STANDAGE.  165pp.  1900.  Price 
7s.  6d.  ;  India  and  Colonies,  8s.  ;  Other*  Countries,  8s.  6d.  ;  strictly 
net. 

Contents. 

Blackings,  Polishes,  Glosses,  Dressings,  Renovators,  etc.,  for  Boot  and  Shoe  Leather  — 
Harness  Blackings,  Dressings,  Greases,  Compositions,  Soaps,  and  Boot-top  Powders  and 
Liquids,  etc.,  etc.  —  Leather  Grinders'  Sundries  —  Currier's  Seasonings,  Blacking  Compounds, 
Dressings,  Finishes,  Glosses,  etc.  —  Dyes  and  Stains  for  Leather  —  Miscellaneous  Information 
—  Chrome  Tannage  —  Index. 


Books  on  Pottery,  Bricks, 
Tiles,  Glass,  etc. 

THE  MANUAL  OF  PRACTICAL  POTTING.      Compiled 

by  Experts,  and  Edited  by  CHAS.  F.  BINNS.  Revised  Third  Edition 
and  Enlarged.  200  pp.  1901.  Price  17s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies, 
18s.  6d. ;  Other  Countries,  20s. ;  strictly  net. 


15 
Contents. 

Introduction.  The  Rise  and  Progress  of  the  Potter's  Art— Bodies.  China  and  Porcelain 
Bodies,  Parian  Bodies,  Semi-porcelain  and  Vitreous  Bodies,  Mortar  Bodies,  Earthenwares 
Granite  and  C.C.  Bodies,  Miscellaneous  Bodies,  Sagger  and  Crucible  Clays,  Coloured 
Bodies,  Jasper  Bodies,  Coloured  Bodies  for  Mosaic  Painting,  Encaustic  Tile  Bodies,  Body 
Stains,  Coloured  Dips — Glazes.  China  Glazes,  Ironstone  Glazes,  Earthenware  Glazes, 
Glazes  without  Lead,  Miscellaneous  Glazes,  Coloured  Glazes,  Majolica  Colours— Gold  and 
Gold  Colours.  Gold,  Purple  of  Cassius,  Marone  and  Ruby,  Enamel  Coloured  Bases, 
Enamel  Colour  Fluxes,  Enamel  Colours,  Mixed  Enamel  Colours,  Antique  and  Vellum 
Enamel  Colours,  Underglaze  Colours,  Underglaze  Colour  Fluxes,  Mixed  Underglaze  Colours, 
Flow  Powders,  Oils  and  Varnishes— Means  and  Methods.  Reclamation  of  Waste  Gold, 
The  Use  of  Cobalt,  Notes  on  Enamel  Colours,  Liquid  or  Bright  Gold— Classification  and 
Analysis.  Classification  of  Clay  Ware,  Lord  Playfair's  Analysis  of  Clays,  The  Markets  of 
the  World,  Time  and  Scale  of  Firing,  Weights  of  Potter's  Material,  Decorated  Goods 
Count— Comparative  Loss  of  Weight  of  Clays— Ground  Felspar  Calculations— The  Conver- 
sion of  Slop  Body  Recipes  into  Dry  Weight— The  Cost  of  Prepared  Earthenware  Clay— 
Forms  and  Tables.  Articles  of  Apprenticeship,  Manufacturer's  Guide  to  Stocktaking, 
Table  of  Relative  Values  of  Potter's  Materials,  Hourly  Wages  Table,  Workman's  Settling 
Table,  Comparative  Guide  for  Earthenware  and  China  Manufacturers  in  the  use  of  Slop  Flint 
and  Slop  Stone,  Foreign  Terms  applied  to  Earthenware  and  China  Goods,  Table  for  the 
Conversion  of  Metrical  Weights  and  Measures  on  the  Continent  and  South  America— Index. 

CERAMIC  TECHNOLOGY :  Being  some  Aspects  of  Tech- 
nical Science  as  Applied  to  Pottery  Manufacture.  Edited  by  CHARLES 
F.  BINNS.  100  pp.  Demy  8vo.  1897.  Price  12s.  6d. ;  India  and 
Colonies,  13s.  6d.  ;  Other  Countries,  15s.  ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Preface— The  Chemistry  of  Pottery  —  Analysis  and  Synthesis  —  Clays  and  their  Com- 
ponents—  The  Biscuit  Oven  —  Pyrometry  —  Glazes  and  their  Composition  —  Colours  and 
Colour-making — Index. 

A   TREATISE   ON   THE    CERAMIC    INDUSTRIES.      A 

Complete  Manual  for  Pottery,  Tile  and  Brick  Works.  By  EMILE 
BOURRY.  Translated  from  the  French  by  WILTON  P.  Rix,  Examiner 
in  Pottery  and  Porcelain  to  the  City  and  Guilds  of  London  Technical 
Institute,  Pottery  Instructor  to  the  Hanley  School  Board.  Royal 
8vo.  1901.  760pp.  323  Illustrations.  Price  21s. ;  India  and  Colonies, 
22s. ;  Other  Countries,  23s.  6d. ;  strictly  net. 
Contents. 

Part  I.,  General  Pottery  Methods.  Definition  and  History.  Definitions  and  Classifi- 
cation of  Ceramic  Products — Historic  Summary  of  the  Ceramic  Art — Raw  Materials  of 
Bodies.  Clays  :  Pure  Clay  and  Natural  Clays — Various  Raw  Materials:  Analogous  to  Clay — 
Agglomerative  and  Agglutinative — Opening — Fusible — Refractory — Trials  of  Raw  Materials 
—Plastic  Bodies.  Properties  and  Composition — Preparation  of  Raw  Materials:  Disaggrega- 
tion— Purification— Preparation  of  Bodies  :  By  Plastic  Method— By  Dry  Method— By  Liquid 
Method — Formation.  Processes  of  Formation  :  Throwing — Expression — Moulding  by  Hand, 
on  the  Jolley,  by  Compression,  by  Slip  Casting — Slapping — Slipping — Drying.  Drying  of 
Bodies — Processes  of  Drying  :  By  Evaporation — By  Aeration — By  Heating — By  Ventilation 
—By  Absorption  —  Glazes.  Composition  and  Properties — Raw  Materials  —  Manufacture 
and  Application — Firing.  Properties  of  the  Bodies  and  Glazes  during  Firing — Description 
of  the  Kilns — Working  of  the  Kilns  —  Decoration.  Colouring  Materials  —  Processes  of 
Decoration. 

Part  II.,  Special  Pottery  Methods.  Terra  Cottas.  Classification:  Plain  Ordinary, 
Hollow,  Ornamental,  Vitrified,  and  Light  Bricks — Ordinary  and  Black  Tiles — Paving  Tiles — 
Pipes — Architectural  Terra  Cottas — Vases,  Statues  and  Decorative  Objects — Common  Pottery 
— Pottery  for  Water  and  Filters — Tobacco  Pipes — Lustre  Ware — Properties  and  Tests  for 
Terra  Cottas  —  Fireclay  Goods.  Classification :  Argillaceous,  Aluminous,  Carboniferous, 
Silicious  and  Basic  Fireclay  Goods — Fireclay  Mortar  (Pug) — Tests  for  Fireclay  Goods — 
Faiences.  Varnished  Faiences— Enamelled  Faiences — Silicious  Faiences — Pipeclay  Faiences 
— Pebble  Work — Feldspathic  Faiences — Composition,  Processes  of  Manufacture  and  General 
Arrangements  of  Faience  Potteries — Stoneware.  Stoneware  Properly  So-called :  Paving 
Tiles— Pipes — Sanitary  Ware — Stoneware  for  Food  Purposes  and  Chemical  Productions — 
Architectural  Stoneware — Vases,  Statues  and  other  Decorative  Objects — Fine  Stoneware 
— Porcelain.  Hard  Porcelain  for  Table  Ware  and  Decoration,  for  the  Fire,  for  Electrical 
Conduits,  for  Mechanical  Purposes;  Architectural  Porcelain,  and  Dull  or  Biscuit  Porcelain — 
Soft  Phosphated  or  English  Porcelain — Soft  Vitreous  Porcelain,  French  and  New  Sevres — 
Argillaceous  Soft  or  Seger's  Porcelain— Dull  Soft  or  Parian  Porcelain— Dull  Feldspathic 
Soft  Porcelain— Index. 


16 

ARCHITECTURAL  POTTERY.  Bricks,  Tiles,  Pipes,  Ena- 
melled Terra-cottas,  Ordinary  and  Incrusted  Quarries,  Stoneware 
Mosaics,  Faiences  and  Architectural  Stoneware.  By  LEON  LEFEVRE. 
With  Five  Plates.  950  Illustrations  in  the  Text,  and  numerous  estimates. 
500  pp.,  royal  8vo.  1900.  Translated  from  the  French  by  K.  H.  BIRD, 
M.A.,  and  W.  MOORE  BINNS.  Price  15s.  ;  India  and  Colonies,  16s.  ; 
Other  Countries,  17s.  6d. ;  strictly  net. 


Contents. 

sry. — Clays, 

Part   II.    Made  =  up   or  Decorated  Pottery. 


Part  I.  Plain  Undecorated  Pottery.— Clays,  Bricks,  Tiles,  Pipes,  Chimney  Flues, 
Terra =cotta. 


THE  ART  OF  RIVETING  GLASS,  CHINA  AND 
EARTHENWARE.  By  J,  HOWARTH.  Second  Edition. 
1900.  Paper  Cover.  Price  Is.  net;  by  post,  home  or  abroad,  Is.  Id. 


HOW  TO  ANALYSE  CLAY.  Practical  Methods  for  Prac- 
tical Men.  By  HOLDEN  M.  ASHBY,  Professor  of  Organic  Chemistry, 
Harvey  Medical  College,  U.S.A.  74  pp.  Twenty  Illus.  1901.  Price 
2s.  6d. ;  Abroad,  3s. ;  strictly  net. 


NOTES  ON  POTTERY  CLAYS.  Their  Distribution,  Pro- 
perties, Uses  and  Analyses  of  Ball  Clays,  China  Clays  and  China 
Stone.  By  JAS.  FAIRIE,  F.G.S.  1901.  132  pp.  Crown  8vo.  Price 
3s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  4s. ;  Other  Countries,  4s.  6d. ;  strictly  net. 


A  Reissue  of 

THE  HISTORY  OF  THE  STAFFORDSHIRE  POTTER- 
IES;  AND  THE  RISE  AND  PROGRESS  OF  THE 
MANUFACTURE  OF  POTTERY  AND  PORCELAIN. 

With  References  to  Genuine  Specimens,  and  Notices  of  Eminent  Pot- 
ters. By  SIMEON  SHAW.  (Originally  Published  in  1829.)  265  pp. 
1900.  Demy  8vo.  Price  7s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  8s. ;  Other 
Countries,  8s.  6d. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Introductory  Chapter  showing  the  position  of  the  Pottery  Trade  at  the  present  time 
1899)— Preliminary  Remarks— The  Potteries,  comprising  Tunstall,  Brownhills,  Green- 
field and  New  Field,  Golden  Hill,  Latebrook,  Green  Lane,  Burslem,  Longport  and  Dale  Hall, 
Hot  Lane  and  Cobridge,  Hanley  and  Shelton,  Etruria,  Stoke,  Penkhull,  Fenton,  Lane  Delph, 
Foley,  Lane  End — On  the  Origin  of  the  Art,  and  its  Practice  among  the  early  Nations — 
Manufacture  of  Pottery,  prior  to  1700— The  Introduction  of  Red  Porcelain  by  Messrs 
Elers,  of  Bradwell,  1690— Progress  of  the  Manufacture  from  1700  to  Mr.  Wedgwood's 
commencement  in  1760— Introduction  of  Fluid  Glaze — Extension  of  the  Manufacture  of 
Cream  Colour — Mr.  Wedgwood's  Queen's  Ware — Jasper,  and  Appointment  of  Potter  to  Her 
Majesty— Black  Printing— Introduction  of  Porcelain.  Mr.  W.  Littler's  Porcelain— Mr 
Cookworthy's  Discovery  of  Kaolin  and  Petuntse,  and  Patent — Sold  to  Mr.  Champion — re- 
sold to  the  New  Hall  Com.— Extension  of  Term— Blue  Printed  Pottery.  Mr.  Turner,  Mr 
Spode  (1),  Mr.  Baddeley,  Mr.  Spode  (2),  Messrs.  Turner,  Mr.  Wood,  Mr.  Wilson,  Mr.  Minton— 
Great  Change  in  Patterns  of  Blue  Printed— Introduction  of  Lustre  Pottery.  Improve 
tnents  in  Pottery  and  Porcelain  subsequent  to  1800. 


17 


A  Reissue  of 

THE  CHEMISTRY  OP  THE  SEVERAL  NATURAL 
AND  ARTIFICIAL  HETEROGENEOUS  COM- 
POUNDS USED  IN  MANUFACTURING  POR- 
CELAIN, GLASS  AND  POTTERY.  By  SIMEON  SHAW. 
(Originally  published  in  1837.)  750pp.  1900.  Royal  8vo.  Price  14s. ; 
India  and  Colonies,  15s. ;  Other  Countries,  16s.  6d. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

PART  I.,  ANALYSIS  AND  MATERIALS.— Introduction  :  Laboratory  and  Apparatus 
Elements— Temperature— Acids  and  Alkalies— The  Earths— Metals. 

PART  II.,  SYNTHESIS  AND  COMPOUNDS.— Science  of  Mixing— Bodies  :  Porcelain 
—Hard,  Porcelain— Fritted  Bodies,  Porcelain— Raw  Bodies,  Porcelain— Soft,  Fritted  Bodies, 
Raw  Bodies,  Stone  Bodies,  Ironstone,  Dry  Bodies,  Chemical  Utensils,  Fritted  Jasper,  Fritted 
Pearl,  Fritted  Drab,  Raw  Chemical  Utensils,  Raw  Stone,  Raw  Jasper,  Raw  Pearl,  Raw  Mortar, 
Raw  Drab,  Raw  Brown,  Raw  Fawn,  Raw  Cane,  Raw  Red  Porous,  Raw  Egyptian,  Earthenware, 
Queen's  Ware,  Cream  Colour,  Blue  and  Fancy  Printed,  Dipped  and  Mocha,  Chalky,  Rings, 
Stilts,  etc.— Glazes:  Porcelain— Hard  Fritted  Porcelain— Soft  Fritted  Porcelain  —  Soft 
Raw,  Cream  Colour  Porcelain,  Blue  Printed  Porcelain,  Fritted  Glazes,  Analysis  of  Fritt, 
Analysis  of  Glaze,  Coloured  Glazes,  Dips,  Smears  and  Washes;  Glasses:  Flint  Glass, 
Coloured  Glasses,  Artificial  Garnet,  Artificial  Emerald,  Artificial  Amethyst,  Artificial  Sap- 
phire, Artificial  Opal,  Plate  Glass,  Crown  Glass,  Broad  Glass,  Bottle  Glass,  Phosphoric  Glass, 
British  Steel  Glass,  Glass-Staining  and  Painting,  Engraving  on  Glass,  Dr.  Faraday's  Experi- 
ments— Colours:  Colour  Making,  Fluxes  or  Solvents,  Components  of  the  Colours;  Reds, 
etc.,  from  Gold,  Carmine  or  Rose  Colour,  Purple,  Reds,  etc.,  from  Iron,  Blues,  Yellows, 
Greens,  Blacks,  White,  Silver  for  Burnishing,  Gold  for  Burnishing,  Printer's  Oil,  Lustres. 

TABLES  OF  THE  CHARACTERISTICS  OF  CHEMICAL  SUBSTANCES. 


Glassware,  Glass  Staining  and 
Painting. 

HECIPES  FOR  FLINT  GLASS  MAKING.  By  a  British 
Glass  Master  and  Mixer.  Sixty  Recipes.  Being  Leaves  from  the 
Mixing  Book  of  several  experts  in  the  Flint  Glass  Trade,  containing 
up-to-date  recipes  and  valuable  information  as  to  Crystal,  Demi-crystal 
and  Coloured  Glass  in  its  many  varieties.  It  contains  the  recipes  for 
cheap  metal  suited  to  pressing,  blowing,  etc.,  as  well  as  the  most  costly 
crystal  and  ruby.  Crown  8vo.  1900.  Price  for  United  Kingdom, 
10s.  6d. ;  Abroad,  15s.;  United  States,  $4;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Ruby — Ruby  from  Copper — Flint  for  using  with  the  Ruby  for  Coating — A  German  Metal — 
•Cornelian,  or  Alabaster — Sapphire  Blue — Crysophis — Opal — Turquoise  Blue — Gold  Colour — 
Dark  Green— Green  (common)— Green  for  Malachite— Blue  for  Malachite— Black  for  Mela- 
^hite — Black — Common  Canary  Batch — Canary — White  Opaque  Glass — Sealing-wax  Red — 
Flint— Flint  Glass  (Crystal  and  Demi)— Achromatic  Glass— Paste  Glass— White  Enamel— 
'Firestone— Dead  White  (for  moons) — White  Agate — Canary — Canary  Enamel — Index. 

A  TREATISE   ON   THE   ART   OF   GLASS   PAINTING. 

Prefaced  with  a  Review  of  Ancient  Glass.  By  ERNEST  R.  SUPPLING. 
With  One  Coloured  Plate  and  Thirty-seven  Illustrations.  Demy  8vo. 
140  pp.  1902.  Price  7s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  8s. ;  Other  Countries, 
8s.  6d.  net. 

Contents. 

A  Short  History  of  Stained  Glass— Designing  Scale  Drawings— Cartoons  and  the  Cut  Line 
— Various  Kinds  of  Glass  Cutting  for  Windows — The  Colours  and  Brushes  used  in  Glass 
Painting — Painting  on  Glass,  Dispersed  Patterns — Diapered  Patterns — Aciding — Firing — 
Fret  Lead  Glazing— Index. 


18 

PAINTING  ON  GLASS  AND  PORCELAIN  AND* 
ENAMEL  PAINTING.  A  Complete  Introduction  to  the 
Preparation  of  all  the  Colours  and  Fluxes  used  for  Painting  on  Porce- 
lain, Enamel,  Faience  and  Stoneware,  the  Coloured  Pastes  and  Col- 
oured Glasses,  together  with  a  Minute  Description  of  the  Firing  of 
Colours  and  Enamels.  By  FELIX  HERMANN,  Technical  Chemist.  With 
Eighteen  Illustrations.  300  pp.  Translated  from  the  German  second 
and  enlarged  Edition.  1897.  Price  10s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies, 
11s.;  Other  Countries,  12s.;  strictly  net. 
Contents. 

History  of  Glass  Painting— The  Articles  to  be  Painted  :  Glass,  Porcelain,  Enamel,  Stone- 
ware, Faience — Pigments:  Metallic  Pigments:  Antimony  Oxide,  Naples  Yellow,  Barium 
Chromate,  Lead  Chromate,  Silver  Chloride,  Chromic  Oxide — Fluxes :  Fluxes,  Felspar, 
Quartz,  Purifying  Quartz,  Sedimentation,  Quenching,  Borax,  Boracic  Acid,  Potassium  and 
Sodium  Carbonates,  Rocaille  Flux  —  Preparation  of  the  Colours  for  Glass  Painting  —  The 
Colour  Pastes — The  Coloured  Glasses — Composition  of  the  Porcelain  Colours — The'  Enamel 
Colours:  Enamels  for  Artistic  Work — Metallic  Ornamentation:  Porcelain  Gilding,  Glass 
Gilding — Firing  the  Colours  :  Remarks  on  Firing  :  Firing  Colours  on  Glass,  Firing  Colours  on 
Porcelain ;  The  Muffle — Accidents  occasionally  Supervening  during  the  Process  of  Firing — 
Remarks  on  the  Different  Methods  of  Painting  on  Glass,  Porcelain,  etc. — Appendix :  Cleaning 
Old  Glass  Paintings. 


Paper  Staining. 


THE  DYEING  OF  PAPER  PULP.  A  Practical  Treatise  for 
the  use  of  Papermakers,  Paperstainers,  Students  and  others.  By 
JULIUS  EKFURT,  Manager  of  a  Paper  Mill.  Translated  into  English 
and  Edited  with  Additions  by  JULIUS  HUBNER,  F.C.S.,  Lecturer  on 
Papermaking  at  the  Manchester  Municipal  Technical  School.  With 
Illustrations  and  157  patterns  of  paper  dyed  in  the  pulp.  Royal 
8vo,  180  pp.  1901.  Price  15s.  ;  India  and  Colonies.  16s.  ;  Other 
Countries,  20s.  ;  strictly  net.  Limited  edition. 

Contents. 

Behaviour  of  the  Paper  Fibres  during  the  Process  of  Dyeing,  Theory  of  the 
Mordant— Colour  Fixing  Mediums  (Mordants)— Influence  of  the  Quality  oi  the  Water 
Used — Inorganic  Colours — Organic  Colours — Practical  Application  of  the  Coal  Tar 
Colours  according  to  their  Properties  and  their  Behaviour  towards  the  Different 
Paper  Fibres — Dyed  Patterns  on  Various  Pulp  Mixtures — Dyeing  to  Shade — Index. 

Enamelling  on  Metal. 

ENAMELS  AND  ENAMELLING.  For  Enamel  Makers,. 
Workers  in  Gold  and  Silver,  and  Manufacturers  of  Objects  of  Art. 
By  PAUL  RANDAU.  Translated  from  the  German.  With  Sixteen  Illus- 
trations. Demy  8vo.  180  pp.  1900.  Price  10s.  6d. ;  India  and" 
Colonies,  11s.;  Other  Countries,  12s. ;  strictly  net. 
Contents. 

Composition  and  Properties  of  Glass — Raw  Materials  for  the  Manufacture  of  Enamels — 
Substances  Added  to  Produce  Opacity — Fluxes — Pigments — Decolorising  Agents — Testing 
the  Raw  Materials  with  the  Blow-pipe  Flame — Subsidiary  Materials  —  Preparing  the 
Materials  for  Enamel  Making — Mixing  the  Materials — The  Preparation  of  Technical  Enamels,, 
The  Enamel  Mass — Appliances  for  Smelting  the  Enamel  Mass — Smelting  the  Charge — 
Composition  of  Enamel  Masses — Composition  of  Masses  for  Ground  Enamels — Composition 
of  Cover  Enamels — Preparing  the  Articles  for  Enamelling — Applying  the  Enamel — Firing, 
the  Ground  Enamel — Applying  and  Firing  the  Cover  Enamel  or  Glaze — Repairing  Defects 
in  Enamelled  Ware — Enamelling  Articles  of  Sheet  Metal — Decorating  Enamelled  Ware — 
Specialities  in  Enamelling — Dial-plate  Enamelling — Enamels  for  Artistic  Purposes,  Recipes 
for  Enamels  of  Various  Colours — Index. 

THE    ART    OP    ENAMELLING    ON    METAL.      By   W. 

NORMAN    BROWN.     Twenty-eight   Illustrations.     Crown   8vo.      60   pp~ 
1900.     Price  2s.  6d. ;  Abroad,  3s. ;  strictly  net. 


19 

Silk   Manufacture. 

SILK    THROWING    AND    WASTE    SILK    SPINNING. 

By  HOLLINS  RAYNER.      Demy  8vo.     170  pp.     117  Illus.     1903.     Price 
5s. ;  Colonies,  5s.   6d. ;  Other  Countries,  6s. ;  strictly  net. 

The  Silkworm— Cocoon  Reeling  and  Qualities  of  Silk— Silk  Throwing— Silk  Wastes— The 
Preparation  of  Silk  Waste  for  Degumming— Silk  Waste  Degumming,  Schapping  and  Dis- 
charging—The Opening  and  Dressing  of  Wastes— Silk  Waste  "  Drawing  "  or  "  Preparing  " 
Machinery— Long  Spinning— Short  Spinning— Spinning  and  Finishing  Processes— Utilisation 
of  Waste  Products— Noil  Spinning— Exhaust  Noil  Spinning. 


Books  on  Textile  and  Dyeing 
Subjects. 

THE  CHEMICAL  TECHNOLOGY  OF  TEXTILE 
FIBRES:  Their  Origin,  Structure,  Preparation,  Washing, 
Bleaching,  Dyeing,  Printing  and  Dressing.  By  Dr.  GEORG  VON 
GEORGIEVICS.  Translated  from  the  German  by  CHARLES  SALTER. 
320  pp.  Forty-seven  Illustrations.  Royal  8vo.  1902.  Price  10s.  6d. ; 
India  and  Colonies,  lls. ;  Other  Countries,  12s.  net. 

Contents. 

The  Textile  Fibres— Washing,  Bleaching,  Carbonising— Mordants  and  Mor- 
danting—Dyeing—Printing—Dressing and  Finishing. 

POWER-LOOM  WEAVING  AND  YARN  NUMBERING, 

According  to  Various  Systems,  with  Conversion  Tables.  Translated 
from  the  German  of  ANTHON  GRUNER.  With  Twenty-Six  Diagrams 
in  Colours.  150  pp.  1900.  Crown  8vo.  Price  7s.  6d.  ;  India  and 
Colonies,  8s. ;  Other  Countries,  8s.  6d. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Power=Loom  Weaving  in  General.  Various  Systems  of  Looms— Mounting  and 
Starting  the  Power=Loom.  English  Looms— Tappet  or  Treadle  Looms— Dobbies— 
General  Remarks  on  the  Numbering,  Reeling  and  Packing  of  Yarn— Appendix— Useful 
Hints.  Calculating  Warps— Weft  Calculations— Calculations  of  Cost  Price  in  Hanks. 

TEXTILE  RAW  MATERIALS  AND  THEIR  CON- 
VERSION INTO  YARNS.  (The  Study  of  the  Raw 
Materials  and  the  Technology  of  the  Spinning  Process.)  By  JULIUS 
ZIPSER.  Translated  from  German  by  CHARLES  SALTER.  302  Illus- 
trations. 500  pp.  Demy  8vo.  1901.  Price  10s.  6d. ;  India  and 
Colonies,  lls.;  Other  Countries,  12s.;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 
PART  I.— The  Raw  Materials  Used  in  the  Textile  Industry. 

MINERAL  RAW  MATERIALS.     VEGETABLE   RAW  MATERIALS.     ANIMAL  RAW  MATERIALS. 
PART  II.— The  Technology  of  Spinning  or  the  Conversion  of  Textile  Raw 
Materials  into  Yarn. 

SPINNING  VEGETABLE  RAW  MATERIALS.  Cotton  Spinning — Installation  of  a  Cotton 
Mill— Spinning  Waste  Cotton  and  Waste  Cotton  Yarns— Flax  Spinning— Fine  Spinning— Tow 
'Spinning — Hemp  Spinning — Spinning  Hemp  Tow  String — Jute  Spinning — Spinning  Jute  Line 
Yarn — Utilising  Jute  Waste. 

PART  III.— Spinning  Animal  Raw  Materials. 

Spinning  Carded  Woollen  Yarn — Finishing  Yarn — Worsted  Spinning — Finishing  Worsted 
Yarn— Artificial  Wool  or  Shoddy  Spinning— Shoddy  and  Mungo  Manufacture— Spinning 
•Shoddy  and  other  Wool  Substitutes — Spinning  Waste  Silk — Chappe  Silk — Fine  Spinning — 
Index. 


20 

THE  TECHNICAL  TESTING  OP  YARNS  AND  TEX- 
TILE FABRICS.  With  Reference  to  Official  Specifica- 
tions. Translated  from  the  German  of  Dr.  J.  HERZFELD.  Second- 
Edition.  Sixty-nine  Illustrations.  200  pp.  Demy  8vo.  1902.  Price 
10s.  6d.;  India  and  Colonies,  11s. ;  Other  Countries,  12s. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Yarn  Testing.  Determining  the  Yarn  Number— Testing  the  Length  of  Yarns- 
Examination  of  the  External  Appearance  of  Yarn— Determining  the  Twist  of  Yarn 
and  Twist  —  Determination  of  Tensile  Strength  and  Elasticity  —  Estimating  the 
Percentage  of  Fat  in  Yarn — Determination  of  Moisture  (Conditioning) — Appendix. 

DECORATIVE  AND  FANCY  TEXTILE  FABRICS. 

By  R.  T.  LORD.  Manufacturers  and  Designers  of  Carpets,  Damask 
Dress  and  all  Textile  Fabrics.  200pp.  1898.  DemySvo.  132  Designs 
and  Illustrations.  Price  7s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  8s. ;  Other 
Countries,  8s.  6d. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

A  Few  Hints  on  Designing  Ornamental  Textile  Fabrics — A  Few  Hints  on  Designing  Orna- 
mental Textile  Fabrics  (continued) — A  Few  Hints  on  Designing  Ornamental  Textile  Fabrics- 
(continued) — A  Few  Hints  on  Designing  Ornamental  Textile  Fabrics  (continued) — Hints  for- 
Ruled-paper  Draughtsmen — The  Jacquard  Machine — Brussels  and  Wilton  Carpets — Tapestry 
Carpets — Ingrain  Carpets — Axminster  Carpets — Damask  and  Tapestry  Fabrics — Scarf  Silks 
and  Ribbons— Silk  Handkerchiefs— Dress  Fabrics— Mantle  Cloths— Figured  Plush— Bed  Quilts 
— Calico  Printing. 

THEORY    AND  PRACTICE    OF  DAMASK  WEAVING. 

By  H.  KINZER  and  K.  WALTER.  Royal  8vo.  Eighteen  Folding  Plates. 
Six  Illustrations.  Translated  from  the  German.  110pp.  1903.  Price 
8s.  6d. ;  Colonies,  9s. ;  Other  Countries,  9s.  6d. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

The  Various  Serts  of  Damask  Fabrics— Drill  (Ticking,  Handloom-made)— Whole- 
Damask  for  Tablecloths — Damask  with  Ground-  and  Connecting-warp  Threads — Furniture 
Damask— Lampas  or  Hangings— Church  Damasks— The  Manufacture  of  Whole  Damask. 
— Damask  Arrangement  with  and  without  Cross-Shedding — The  Altered  Cone-arrangement — 
The  Principle  of  the  Corner  Lifting  Cord — The  Roller  Principle — The  Combination  of  the 
Jacquard  with  the  so-called  Damask  Machine — The  Special  Damask  Machine — The  Combina- 
tion of  Two  Tyings. 

FAULTS  IN  THE  MANUFACTURE  OF  WOOLLEN 
GOODS  AND  THEIR  PREVENTION.  By  NICOLAS 
REISER.  Translated  from  the  Second  German  Edition.  Crown  8vo. 
Sixty-three  Illustrations.  170  pp.  1903.  Price  5s. ;  Colonies,  5s.  6d.  -r 
Other  Countries,  6s.  ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Improperly  Chosen  Raw  Material  or  Improper  Mixtures — Wrong  Treatment  of  the 
Material  in  Washing,  Carbonisation,  Drying,  Dyeing  and  Spinning — Improper  Spacing  of  the- 
Goods  in  the  Loom — Wrong  Placing  of  Colours — Wrong  Weight  or  Width  of  the  Goods- 
—Breaking  of  Warp  and  Weft  Threads— Presence  of  Doubles,  Singles,  Thick,  Loose, 
and  too  Hard  Twisted  Threads  as  well  as  Tangles,  Thick  Knots  and  the  Like— Errors  in 
Cross-weaving — Inequalities,  i.e.,  Bands  and  Stripes — Dirty  Borders — Defective  Selvedges — 
Holes  and  Buttons — Rubbed  Places — Creases — Spots — Loose  and  Bad  Colours — Badly  Dyed' 
Selvedges — Hard  Goods — Brittle  Goods — Uneven  Goods — Removal  of  Bands,  Stripes, 
Creases  and  Spots. 

SPINNING  AND  WEAVING  CALCULATIONS,  especially 
relating  to  Woollens.     From  the  German  of  N.  REISER.     Thirty-four 
Illustrations.      Tables.      170  pp.      Demy  8vo.      1904.      Price  10s.  6d. 
India  and  Colonies,  lls. ;  Other  Countries,  12s. ;  strictly  net. 
Contents. 

Calculating  the  Raw  Material— Proportion  of  Different  Grades  of  Wool  to  Furnish  a 
Mixture  at  a  Given  Price — Quantity  to  Produce  a  Given  Length — Yarn  Calculations — Yam 
Number — Working  Calculations — Calculating  the  Reed  Count — Cost  of  Weaving,  etc. 


21 

WATERPROOFING  OF  FABRICS.  By  Dr.  S.  MIERZINSKU 
Crown  8vo.  104  pp.  29  Illus.  1903.  Price  5s. ;  Colonies,  5s.  6d. ; 
Other  Countries,  6s.  ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Introduction  —  Preliminary  Treatment  of  the  Fabric  —  Waterproofing  with  Acetate  of 
Alumina — Impregnation  of  the  Fabric — Drying — Waterproofing  with  Paraffin — Waterproofing 
with  Ammonium  Cuprate  —  Waterproofing  with  Metallic  Oxides  —  Coloured  Waterproof 
Fabrics — Waterproofing  with  Gelatine,  Tannin,  Caseinate  of  Lime  and  other  Bodies — Manu- 
facture of  Tarpaulin — British  Waterproofing  Patents — Index. 

HOW  TO  MAKE  A  WOOLLEN  MILL  PAY.  By  JOHN 
MACKIE.  Crown  8vo.  76  pp.  1904.  Price  3s.  6d. ;  Colonies,  4s.  ; 
Other  Countries,  4s.  6d. ;  net. 

Contents. 

Blends,  Piles,  or  Mixtures  of  Clean  Scoured  Wools — Dyed  Wool  Book — The  Order  Book 
— Pattern  Duplicate  Books — Management  and  Oversight — Constant  Inspection  of  Mill   De- 
partments— Importance  of  Delivering  Goods  to  Time,  Shade,  Strength,  etc. — Plums. 
(For  "Textile  Soaps"  see  p.  7.) 

Dyeing,     Colour     Printing, 
Matching  and  Dye-stuffs. 

THE  COLOUR  PRINTING  OF  CARPET  YARNS.   Manual 

for   Colour   Chemists   and   Textile    Printers.      By   DAVID    PATERSON, 

F.C.S.     Seventeen   Illustrations.      136  pp.      Demy  8vo.    1900.     Price 

7s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  8s. ;  Other  Countries,  8s.  6d. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Structure  and  Constitution  of  Wool  Fibre — Yarn  Scouring — Scouring  Materials — Water  for 
Scouring — Bleaching  Carpet  Yarns — Colour  Making  for  Yarn  Printing — Colour  Printing 
Pastes — Colour  Recipes  for  Yarn  Printing — Science  of  Colour  Mixing — Matching  of  Colours 
— "Hank"  Printing — Printing  Tapestry  Carpet  Yarns — Yarn  Printing — Steaming  Printed 
Yarns — Washing  of  Steamed  Yarns — Aniline  Colours  Suitable  for  Yarn  Printing — Glossary  of 
Dyes  and  Dye-wares  used  in  Wood  Yarn  Printing — Appendix. 

THE  SCIENCE  OP  COLOUR  MIXING.  A  Manual  in- 
tended for  the  use  of  Dyers,  Calico  Printers  and  Colour  Chemists.  By 
DAVID  PATERSON,  F.C.S.  Forty-one  Illustrations,  Five  Coloured  Plates, 
and  Four  Plates  showing:  Eleven  Dyed  Specimens  of  Fabrics.  132 

pp.     Demy  8vo.     1900.     Price  7s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  8s. ;  Other 
Countries,  8s.  6d.  ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Colour  a  Sensation ;  Colours  of  Illuminated  Bodies ;  Colours  of  Opaque  and  Transparent 
Bodies ;  Surface  Colour — Analysis  of  Light ;  Spectrum ;  Homogeneous  Colours ;  Ready 
Method  of  Obtaining  a  Spectrum — Examination  of  Solar  Spectrum;  The  Spectroscope  and 
Its  Construction ;  Colourists'  Use  of  the  Spectroscope — Colour  by  Absorption  ;  Solutions  and 
Dyed  Fabrics;  Dichroic  Coloured  Fabrics  in  Gaslight — Colour  Primaries  of  the  Scientist 
versus  the  Dyer  and  Artist;  Colour  Mixing  by  Rotation  and  Lye  Dyeing;  Hue,  Purity, 
Brightness;  Tints;  Shades,  Scales,  Tones,  Sad  and  Sombre  Colours— Colour  Mixing;  Pure 
and  Impure  Greens,  Orange  and  Violets;  Large  Variety  of  Shades  from  few  Colours;  Con- 
sideration of  the  Practical  Primaries:  Red,  Yellow  and  Blue — Secondary  Colours;  Nomen- 
clature of  Violet  and  Purple  Group ;  Tints  and  Shades  of  Violet ;  Changes  in  Artificial  Light 
— Tertiary  Shades  ;  Broken  Hues;  Absorption  Spectra  of  Tertiary  Shades — Appendix :  Four 
Plates  with  Dyed  Specimens  Illustrating  Text— Index. 

DYERS'  MATERIALS :  An  Introduction  to  the  Examination, 
Evaluation  and  Application  of  the  most  important  Substances  used  in 
Dyeing,  Printing,  Bleaching  and  Finishing.  By  PAUL  HEERMAN,  Ph.D. 
Translated  from  the  German  by.  A  C.  WRIGHT,  M.A.  (Oxon.),  B.Sc. 
(Lond.).  Twenty-four  Illustrations.  Crown  8vo.  150pp.  1901.  Price 
5s.  ;  India  and  Colonies,  5s.  6d.  ;  Other  Countries,  6s. ;  strictly  net. 


22 

COLOUR  MATCHING  ON  TEXTILES.  A  Manual  in- 
tended for  the  use  of  Students  of  Colour  Chemistry,  Dyeing  and 
Textile  Printing.  By  DAVID  PATERSON,  F.C.S.  Coloured  Frontis- 
piece. Twenty-nine  Illustrations  and  Fourteen  Specimens  Of  Dyed 
Fabrics.  Demy  8vo.  132pp.  1901.  Price  7s.  6d.;  India  and  Colonies, 
8s. ;  Other  Countries,  8s.  6d. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Colour  Vision  and  Structure  of  the  Eye — Perception  of  Colour— Primary  and  Comple- 
.mentary  Colour  Sensations — Daylight  for  Colour  Matching — Selection  of  a  Good  Pure  Light 
—Diffused  Daylight,  Direct  Sunlight,  Blue  Skylight,  Variability  of  Daylight,  etc.,  etc.— 
Matching  of  Hues — Purity  and  Luminosity  of  Colours — Matching  Bright  Hues— Aid  of  Tinted 
Films — Matching  Difficulties  Arising  from  Contrast — Examination  of  Colours  by  Reflected 
and  Transmitted  Lights — Effect  of  Lustre  and  Transparency  of  Fibres  in  Colour  Matching 
— Matching  of  Colours  on  Velvet  Pile — Optical  Properties  of  Dye  stuffs  Dichroism.  Fluor- 
escence— Use  of  Tinted  Mediums — Orange  Film — Defects  of  the  Eye — Yellowing  of  the  Lens 
— Colour  Blindness,  etc. — Matching  of  Dyed  Silk  Trimmings  and  Linings  and  Bindings — Its 
Difficulties — Behaviour  of  Shades  in  Artificial  Light — Colour  Matching  of  Old  Fabrics,  etc.— 
Examination  of  Dyed  Colours  under  the  Artificial  Lights — Electric  Arc,  Magnesium  and  Dufton, 
Gardner  Lights,  Welsbach,  Acetylene,  etc. — Testing  Qualities  of  an  Illuminant — Influence 
of  the  Absorption  Spectrum  in  Changes  of  Hue  under  the  Artificial  Lights — Study  of  the 
Causes  of  Abnormal  Modifications  of  Hue,  etc. 


COLOUR:  A  HANDBOOK  OP  THE  THEORY  OF 
COLOUR.  By  GEORGE  H.  HURST,  F.C.S.  With  Ten 
Coloured  Plates  and  Seventy-two  Illustrations.  160  pp.  Demy  8vo. 
1900.  Price  7s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  8s. ;  Other  Countries,  8s.  6d. ; 
strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Colour  and  Its  Production— Cause  of  Colour  in  Coloured  Bodies— Colour  Pheno= 
mena  and  Theories— The  Physiology  of  Light— Contrast— Colour  in  Decoration  and 
Design— Measurement  of  Colour. 


Reissue  of 
THE  ART  OF  DYEING  WOOL,  SILK   AND    COTTON. 

Translated  from  the  French  of  M.  HELLOT,  M.  MACQUER  and  M.  LE 
PILEUR  D'APLIGNY.  First  Published  in  English  in  1789.  Six  Plates. 
Demy  8vo.  446  pp.  1901.  Price  5s.;  India  and  Colonies,  5s.  6d.  ; 
Other  Countries,  6s. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Part  I.,  The  Art  of  Dyeing  Wool  and  Woollen  Cloth,  Stuffs,  Yarn,  Worsted,  etc. 
Part  II.,  The  Art  of  Dyeing  Silk.  Part  HI.,  The  Art  of  Dyeing  Cotton  and  Linen 
Thread,  together  with  the  Method  of  Stamping  Silks,  Cottons,  etc. 


THE  CHEMISTRY  OF  DYE-STUFFS.  By  Dr.  GEORG  VON 
GEORGIEVICS.  Translated  from  the  Second  German  Edition.  412  pp. 
Demy  8vo.  1903.  Price  10s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  11s.;  Other 
Countries,  12s. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Introduction — Coal  Tar — Intermediate  Products  in  the  Manufacture  of  Dye-stuffs — The 
-Artificial  Dye-stuffs  (Coal-tar  Dyes) — Nitroso  Dye-stuffs — Nitro  Dye-stuffs — Azo  Dye-stuffs — 
Substantive  Cotton  Dye-stuffs  — Azoxystilbene  Dye-stuffs—  Hydrazones  —  Ketoneimides — 
Triphenylmethane  Dye-stuffs — Rosolic  Acid  Dye-stuffs — Xanthene  Dye-stuffs — Xanthone  Dye- 
stuffs — Flavones — Oxyketone  Dye-stuffs — Quinoline  and  Acndine  Dye-stuffs — Quinonimide 
or  Diphenylamine  Dye-stuffs — The  Azine  Group:  Eurhodines,  Safranines  and  Indulines — 
Eurhodines — Safranines  —  Quinoxalines — Indigo  —  Dye-stuffs  of  Unknown  Constitution  — 
•Sulphur  or  Sulphine  Dye  stuffs— Development  of  the  Artificial  Dye-stuff  Industry— The 
.Natural  Dye-stuffs — Mineral  Colours — Index. 


23 

THE  DYEING  OF  COTTON  FABRICS:  A  Practical 
Handbook  for  the  Dyer  and  Student.  By  FRANKLIN  BEECH,  Practical 
Colourist  and  Chemist.  272  pp.  Forty-four  Illustrations  of  Bleaching 
and  Dyeing  Machinery.  Demy  8vo.  1901.  Price  7s.  6d.  ;  India 
and  Colonies,  8s.  ;  Other  Countries,  8s.  6d.  ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Structure  and  Chemistry  of  the  Cotton  Fibre — Scouring  and  Bleaching  of  Cotton — Dyeing 
Machinery  and  Dyeing  Manipulations — Principles  and  Practice  of  Cotton  Dyeing — Direct 
Dyeing;  Direct  Dyeing  followed  by  Fixation  with  Metallic  Salts:  Direct  Dyeing  followed  by 
Fixation  with  Developers;  Direct  Dyeing  followed  by  Fixation  with  Couplers;  Dyeing  on 
Tannic  Mordant ;  Dyeing  on  Metallic  Mordant ;  Production  of  Colour  Direct  upon  Cotton 
Fibres ;  Dyeing  Cotton  by  Impregnation  with  Dye-stuff  Solution — Dyeing  Union  (Mixed  Cotton 
and  Wool)  Fabrics— Dyeing  Half  Silk  (Cotton-Silk,  Satin)  Fabrics— Operations  following 
Dyeing — Washing,  Soaping,  Drying — Testing  of  the  Colour  of  Dyed  Fabrics — Experimental 
Dyeing  and  Comparative  Dye  Testing— Index. 

The  book  contains  numerous  recipes  for  the  production  on  Cotton  Fabrics  of  all  kinds  of  a 
great  range  of  colours. 

THE  DYEING  OF  WOOLLEN  FABRICS.  By  FRANKLIN 
BEECH,  Practical  Colourist  and  Chemist.  Thirty-three  Illustrations. 
Demy  8vo.  228  pp.  1902.  Price  7s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  8s. ; 
Other  Countries,  8s.  6d.  net. 

Contents. 

The  Wool  Fibre — Structure,  Composition  and  Properties — Processes  Preparatory  to  Dyeing 
— Scouring  and  Bleaching  of  Wool — Dyeing  Machinery  and  Dyeing  Manipulations — Loose 
Wool  Dyeing,  Yarn  Dyeing  and  Piece  Dyeing  Machinery — The  Principles  and  Practice  of 
Wool  Dyeing — Properties  of  Wool  Dyeing — Methods  of  Wool  Dyeing — Groups  of  Dyes — 
Dyeing  with  the  Direct  Dyes — Dyeing  with  Basic  Dyes — Dyeing  with  Acid  Dyes — Dyeing 
with  Mordant  Dyes— Level  Dyeing— Blacks  on  Wool— Reds  on  Wool— Mordanting  of  Wool- 
Orange  Shades  on  Wool— Yellow  Shades  on  Wool— Green  Shades  on  Wool— Blue  Shades  on 
Wool — Violet  Shades  on  Wool — Brown  Shades  on  Wool — Mode  Colours  on  Wool — Dyeing; 
Union  (Mixed  Cotton  Wool)  Fabrics — Dyeing  of  Gloria — Operations  following  Dyeing — 
Washing,  Soaping.  Drying — Experimental  Dyeing  and  Comparative  Dye  Testing — Testing  of 
the  Colour  of  Dyed  Fabrics— Index. 


Bleaching  and  Washing. 

A  PRACTICAL  TREATISE  ON  THE  BLEACHING  OF 
LINEN  AND  COTTON  YARN   AND   FABRICS.     By 

L.  TAILFER,  Chemical  and  Mechanical  Engineer.  Translated  from  the 
French  by  JOHN  GEDDES  MC!NTOSH.  Demy  8vo.  303  pp.  Twenty 
Illusts.  1901.  Price  12s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  13s.  6d. ;  Other 
Countries,  15s. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

General  Considerations  on  Bleaching — Steeping — Washing:  Its  End  and  Importance — 
Roller  Washing  Machines— Wash  Wheel  (Dash  Wheel)— Stocks  or  Wash  Mill— Squeezing— 
Lye  Boiling — Lye  Boiling  with  Milk  of  Lime — Lye  Boiling  with  Soda  Lyes — Description  of 
Lye  Bojiing  Keirs — Operations  of  Lye  Boiling — Concentration  of  Lyes — Mather  and  Platt's. 
Keir — Description  of  the  Keir— Saturation  of  the  Fabrics — Alkali  used  in  Lye  Boiling — 
Examples  of  Processes — Soap — Action  of  Soap  in  Bleaching — Quality  and  Quantity  of  Soaps 
to  use  in  the  Lye — Soap  Lyes  or  Scalds — Soap  Scouring  Stocks — Bleaching  on  Grass  or  on 
the  Bleaching  Green  or  Lawn — Chemicking — Remarks  on  Chlorides  and  their  Decolour- 
ising Action — Chemicking  Cisterns — Chemicking — Strengths,  etc. — Sours— Properties  of  the 
Acids — Effects  Produced  by  Acids — Souring  Cisterns — Drying — Drying  by  Steam — Drying 
by  Hot  Air — Drying  by  Air — Damages  to  Fabrics  in  Bleaching^-Yarn  Mildew — Fermentation 
— Iron  Rust  Spots — Spots  from  Contact  with  Wood — Spots  incurred  on  the  Bleaching  Green 
— Damages  arising  from  the  Machines — Examples  of  Methods  used  in  Bleaching— Linen — 
Cotton — The  Valuation  of  Caustic  and  Carbonated  Alkali  (Soda)  and  General  Information 
Regarding  these  Bodies — Object  of  Alkalimetry — Titration  of  Carbonate  of  Soda — Com- 
parative Table  of  Different  Degrees  of  Alkalimetrical  Strength — Five  Problems  relative  to 
Carbonate  of  Soda— Caustic  Soda,  its  Properties  and  Uses — Mixtures  of  Carbonated  and 
Caustic  Alkali — Note  on  a  Process  of  Manufacturing  Caustic  Soda  and  Mixtures  of  Caustic 


24 

and  Carbonated  Alkali  (Soda)— Chlorometry— Titration— Wagner  s  Chlorometric  Method—. 
Preparation  of  Standard  Solutions — Apparatus  for  Chlorine  Valuation — Alkali  in  Excess  in 
Decolourising  Chlorides  —  Chlorine  and  Decolourising  Chlorides  —  Synopsis — Chlorine — 
Chloride  of  Lime — Hypochlorite  of  Soda — Brochoki's  Chlorozone — Various  Decolourising 
Hypochlorites — Comparison  of  Chloride  of  Lime  and  Hypochlorite  of  Soda — Water — 
Qualities  of  Water— Hardness— Dervaux's  Purifier— Testing  the  Purified  Water— Different 
Plant  for  Purification — Filters — Bleaching  of  Yarn — Weight  of  Yarn — Lye  Boiling — 
Chemicking— Washing— Bleaching  of  Cotton  Yarn— The  Installation  of  a  Bleach  Works- 
Water  Supply  —  Steam  Boilers  —  Steam  Distribution  Pipes — Engines — Keirs — Washing — 
Machines — Stocks — Wash  Wheels — Chemicking  and  Souring  Cisterns — Various — Buildings — 
Addenda — Energy  of  Decolourising  Chlorides  and  Bleaching  by  Electricity  and  Ozone — 
Energy  of  Decolourising  Chlorides — Chlorides — Production  of  Chlorine  and  Hypochlorites 
by  Electrolysis — Lunge's  Process  for  increasing  the  intensity  of  the  Bleaching  Power  of 
Chloride  of  Lime — Trilfer's  Process  for  Removing  the  Excess  of  Lime  or  Soda  from  De- 
colourising Chlorides — Bleaching  by  Ozone. 


Cotton  Spinning  and  Combing. 

COTTON  SPINNING  (First  Year).  By  THOMAS  THORNLEY, 
Spinning  Master,  Bolton  Technical  School.  160  pp.  Eighty-four  Illus- 
trations. Crown  8vo.  1901.  Price  3s.;  Abroad,  3s.  6d. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Syllabus  and  Examination  Papers  of  the  City  and  Guilds  of  London  Institute — Cultiva- 
tion, Classification,  Ginning,  Baling  and  Mixing  of  the  Raw  Cotton — Bale-Breakers,  Mixing 
Lattices  and  Hopper  Feeders — Opening  and  Scutching — Carding — Indexes. 

COTTON  SPINNING  (Intermediate,  or  Second  Year).  By 
THOMAS  THORNLEY.  180pp.  Seventy  Illustrations.  Crown  Svo.  1901. 
Price  5s. ;  India  and  British  Colonies,  5s.  6d.  ;  Other  Countries,  6s. ; 
strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Syllabuses  and  Examination  Papers  of  the  City  and  Guilds  of  London  Institute — The 
Combing  Process — The  Drawing  Frame — Bobbin  and  Fly  Frames — Mule  Spinning — Ring 
Spinning — General  Indexes. 

COTTON  SPINNING  (Honours,  or  Third  Year).  By  THOMAS 
THORNLEY.  216  pp.  Seventy-four  Illustrations.  Crown  Svo.  1901. 
Price  5s. ;  India  and  British  Colonies,  5s.  6d. ;  Other  Countries,  6s. ; 
strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Syllabuses  and  Examination  Papers  of  the  City  and  Guilds  of  London  Institute — Cotton — 
The  Practical  Manipulation  of  Cotton  Spinning  Machinery — Doubling  and  Winding — Reeling 
— Warping — Production  and  Costs — Main  Driving — Arrangement  of  Machinery  and  Mill 
Planning — Waste  and  Waste  Spinning — Indexes. 

COTTON  COMBING  MACHINES.  By  THOS.  THORNLEY, 
Spinning  Master,  Technical  School,  Bolton.  Demy  Svo.  117  Illustra- 
tions. 300  pp.  1902.  Price  7s.  6d.  ;  India  and  Colonies,  8s. ;  Other 
Countries,  8s.  6d.  net. 

Contents. 

The  Sliver  Lap  Machine  and  the  Ribbon  Cap  Machine — General  Description  of  the  Heilmann 
Comber — The  Cam  Shaft — On  the  Detaching  and  Attaching  Mechanism  of  the  Comber — 
Resetting  of  Combers— The  Erection  of  a  Heilmann  Comber— Stop  Motions :  Various  Calcu- 
lations— Various  Notes  and  Discussions— Cotton  Combing  Machines  of  Continental  Make — 
Index. 


25 

Collieries  and  Mines. 

RECOVERY  WORK  AFTER  PIT  FIRES.  By  ROBERT 
LAMPRECHT,  Mining  Engineer  and  Manager.  Translated  from  the 
German.  Illustrated  by  Six  large  Plates,  containing  Seventy-six 
Illustrations.  175  pp.,  demy  8vo.  1901.  Price  10s.  6d.  ;  India  and 
Colonies,  11s.;  Other  Countries,  12s.;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Causes  of  Pit  Fires— Preventive  Regulations  :  (1)  The  Outbreak  and  Rapid  Extension 
of  a  Shaft  Fire  can  be  most  reliably  prevented  by  Employing  little  or  no  Combustible  Material 
in  the  Construction  of  the  Shaft ;  (2)  Precautions  for  Rapidly  Localising  an  Outbreak  of  Fire  in 
the  Shaft ;  (3)  Precautions  to  be  Adopted  in  case  those  under  1  and  2  Fail  or  Prove  Inefficient. 
Precautions  against  Spontaneous  Ignition  of  Coal.  Precautions  for  Preventing  Explosions  of 
Fire-damp  and  Coal  Dust.  Employment  of  Electricity  in  Mining,  particularly  in  Fiery  Pits, 
Experiments  on  the  ignition  of  Fire-damp  Mixtures  and  Clouds  of  Coal  Dust  by  Electricity — 
Indications  of  an  Existing  or  Incipient  Fire— Appliances  for  Working  in  Irrespirable 
Gases:  Respiratory  Apparatus;  Apparatus  with  Air  Supply  Pipes;  Reservoir  Apparatus; 
Oxygen  Apparatus— Extinguishing  Pit  Fires  :  (a)  Chemical  Means ;  (b)  Extinction  with 
Water.  Dragging  down  the  Burning  Masses  and  Packing  with  Clay ;  (c)  Insulating  the  Seat 
of  the  Fire  by  Dams.  Dam  Building.  Analyses  of  Fire  Gases.  Isolating  the  Seat  of  a  Fire 
with  Dams:  Working  in  Irrespirable  Gases  ("Gas-diving"):  Air-Lock  Work.  Complete 
Isolation  of  the  Pit.  Flooding  a  Burning  Section  isolated  by  means  of  Dams.  Wooden 
Dams:  Masonry  Dams.  Examples  of  Cylindrical  and  Dome-shaped  Dams.  Dam  Doors: 
Flooding  the  Whole  Pit — Rescue  Stations  :  (a)  Stations  above  Ground ;  (b)  Underground 
Rescue  Stations— Spontaneous  Ignition  of  Coal  in  Bulk— Index.; 

VENTILATION  IN  MINES.  By  ROBERT  WABNER,  Mining 
Engineer.  Translated  from  the  German.  Royal  8vo.  Thirty  Plates 
and  Twenty-two  Illustrations.  240  pp.  1903.  Price  10s.  6d. ;  India 
and  Colonies,  11s.;  Other  Countries,  12s.;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

The  Causes  of  the  Contamination  of  Pit  Air— The  Means  of  Preventing  the 
Dangers  resulting  from  the  Contamination  of  Pit  Air — Calculating  the  Volume 
of  Ventilating  Current  necessary  to  free  Pit  Air  from  Contamination— Determination 
of  the  Resistance  Opposed  to  the  Passage  of  Air  through  the  Pit— Laws  of  Re= 
sistance  and  Formulae  therefor— Fluctuations  in  the  Temperament  or  Specific  Re- 
sistance of  a  Pit— Means  for  Providing  a  Ventilating  Current  in  the  Pit— Mechani- 
cal Ventilation— Ventilators  and  Fans— Determining  the  Theoretical,  Initial,  and 
True  (Effective)  Depression  of  the  Centrifugal  Fan— New  Types  of  Centrifugal  Fan 
of  Small  Diameter  and  High  Working  Speed— Utilising  the  Ventilating  Current  to 
the  utmost  Advantage  and  distributing  the  same  through  the  Workings— Artifici- 
ally retarding  the  Ventilating  Current— Ventilating  Preliminary  Workings— Blind 
Headings— Separate  Ventilation— Supervision  of  Ventilation— INDEX. 

HAULAGE    AND   WINDING   APPLIANCES   USED   IN 
MINES.      By  CARL  VOLK.      Translated  from  the  German. 
Royal  8vo.     With   Six   Plates  and   148   Illustrations.      150  pp.      1903. 
Price  8s.  6d. ;  Colonies,  9s. ;  Other  Countries,  9s.  6d. ;  strictly  net. 
Contents. 

Haulage  Appliances — Ropes — Haulage  Tubs  and  Tracks — Cages  and  Winding  Appliances — 
Winding  Engines  for  Vertical  Shafts — Winding  without  Ropes — Haulage  in  Levels  and 
Inclines— The  Working  of  Underground  Engines — Machinery  for  Downhill  Haulage. 

Dental  Metallurgy. 

DENTAL  METALLURGY :    MANUAL  FOR  STUDENTS 
AND   DENTISTS.      By  A.    B.   GRIFFITHS,   Ph.D.      Demy 
8vo.     Thirty-six   Illustrations.     190^,     200  pp.     Price  7s.   6d. ;   India 
and  Colonies,  8s. ;  Other  Countries,  8s.  6d. ;  strictly  net. 
Contents. 

Introduction — Physical  Properties  of  the  Metals — Action  of  Certain  Agents  on  Metals — 
Alloys — Action  of  Oral  Bacteria  on  Alloys — Theory  and  Varieties  of  Blowpipes — Fluxes — 
Furnaces  and  Appliances — Heat  and  Temperature— Gold — Mercury — Silver — Iron — Copper — 
Zinc — Magnesium — Cadmium — Tin — Lead  —  Aluminium — Antimony  —  Bismuth  —  Palladium — 
Platinum— Iridium— Nickel— Practical  Work— Weights  and  Measures. 


26 


Engineering,    Smoke    Prevention 
and  Metallurgy. 

THE  PREVENTION  OF  SMOKE.  Combined  with  the 
Economical  Combustion  of  Fuel.  By  W.  C.  POPPLEWELL,  M.Sc., 
A.M.Inst.,C  E.,  Consulting  Engineer.  Forty-six  Illustrations.  190pp. 
1901.  Demy  8vo.  Price  7s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  8s.  ;  Other 
Countries,  8s.  6d.  ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Fuel  and  Combustion —  Hand  Firing  in  Boiler  Furnaces — Stoking  by  Mechanical  Means — 
Powdered  Fuel— Gaseous  Fuel— Efficiency  and  Smoke  Tests  of  Boilers— Some  Standard 
Smoke  Trials — The  Legal  Aspect  of  the  Smoke  Question — The  Best  Means  to  be  adopted  for 
the  Prevention  of  Smoke — Index. 

GAS  AND  COAL  DUST  FIRING.  A  Critical  Review  of 
the  Various  Appliances  Patented  in  Germany  for  this  purpose  since 
1885.  By  ALBERT  PUTSCH.  130  pp.  Demy  8vo.  1901.  Translated 
from  the  German.  With  103  Illustrations.  Price  7s.  6d. ;  India  and 
Colonies,  8s. ;  Other  Countries,  8s.  6d. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Generators — Generators  Employing  Steam — Stirring  and  Feed  Regulating  Appliances — 
Direct  Generators — Burners — Regenerators  and  Recuperators — Glass  Smelting  Furnaces — 
Metallurgical  Furnaces — Pottery  Furnace — Coal  Dust  Firing — Index. 

THE  HARDENING  AND  TEMPERING  OP  STEEL 
IN  THEORY  AND  PRACTICE.  By  FRIDOLIN  REISER. 
Translated  from  the  German  of  the  Third  Edition.  Crown  8vo. 
120  pp.  1903.  Price  5s. ;  India  and  British  Colonies,  5s.  6d. ;  Other 
Countries,  6s. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Steel— Chemical  and  Physical  Properties  of  Steel,  and  their  Casual  Connection- 
Classification  of  Steel  according  to  Use— Testing-  the  Quality  of  Steel  —  Steel» 
Hardening— Investigation  of  the  Causes  of  Failure  in  Hardening— Regeneration  of 
Steel  Spoilt  in  the  Furnace— Welding  Steel— Index. 

SIDEROLOGY:  THE  SCIENCE  OP  IRON  (The  Con- 
stitution of  Iron  Alloys  and  Slags).  Translated  from  German  of 
HANNS  FREIHERR  v.  JUPTNER.  350  pp.  Demy  8vo.  Eleven  Plates 
and  Ten  Illustrations.  1902.  Price  10s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  11s. ; 
Other  Countries,  12s. ;  net. 

Contents. 

The  Theory  of  Solution. — Solutions — Molten  Alloys — Varieties  of  Solutions — Osmotic 
Pressure — Relation  between  Osmotic  Pressure  and  other  Properties  of  Solutions — Osmotic 
Pressure  and  Molecular  Weight  of  the  Dissolved  Substance — Solutions  of  Gases — Solid  Solu- 
tions— Solubility — Diffusion — Electrical  Conductivity — Constitution  of  Electrolytes  and  Metals 
— Thermal  Expansion.  Micrography. — Microstructure — The  Micrographic  Constituents  of 
Iron— Relation  between  Micrographical  Composition,  Carbon-Content,  and  Thermal  Treat- 
ment of  Iron  Alloys — The  Microstructure  of  Slags.  Chemical  Composition  of  the  Alloys 
of  Iron. — Constituents  of  Iron  Alloys — Carbon — Constituents  of  the  Iron  Alloys,  Carbon — 
Opinions  and  Researches  on  Combined  Carbon — Opinions  and  Researches  on  Combined 
Carbon — Applying  the  Curves  of  Solution  deduced  from  the  Curves  of  Recalescence  to  the  De- 
termination of  the  Chemical  Composition  of  the  Carbon  present  in  Iron  Alloys — The  Constitu- 
ents of  Iron — Iron — The  Constituents  of  Iron  Alloys — Manganese — Remaining  Constituents  of 
Iron  Alloys— A  Silicon— Gases.  The  Chemical  Composition  of  Slag.— Silicate  Slags- 
Calculating  the  Composition  of  Silicate  Slags— Phosphate  Slags— Oxide  Slags— Appendix- 
Index. 


27 

EVAPORATING,  CONDENSING  AND  COOLING  AP- 
PARATUS. Explanations,  Formulas  and  Tables  for  Use 
in  Practice.  By  E.  HAUSBRAND,  Engineer.  Translated  by  A.  C. 
WRIGHT,  M.A.  (Oxon.),  B.Sc.  (Lond.).  With  Twenty-one  Illustra- 
tions and  Seventy-six  Tables.  400  pp.  Demy  8vo.  1903.  Price 
10s.  6d.  ;  India  and  Colonies,  11s.;  Other  Countries,  12s.;  net. 
Contents. 

^Coefficient  of  Transmission  of  Heat,  k/,  and  the  Mean  Temperature  Difference,  0/m — 
Parallel  and  Opposite  Currents — Apparatus~or  Heating  with  Direct  Fire — The  Injection  of 
Saturated  Steam — Superheated  Steam — Evaporation  by  Means  of  Hot  Liquids — The  Trans- 
ference of  Heat  in  General,  and  Transference  by  means  of  Saturated  Steam  in  Particular 
—The  Transference  of  Heat  from  Saturated  Steam  in  Pipes  (Coils)  and  Double  Bottoms 
— Evaporation  in  a  Vacuum — The  Multiple-effect  Evaporator — Multiple-effect  Evaporators 
from  which  Extra  Steam  is  Taken — The  Weight  of  Water  which  must  be  Evaporated  from 
100  Kilos,  of  Liquor  in  order  its  Original  Percentage  of  Dry  Materials  from  1-25  per  cent, 
up  to  20-70  per  cent. — The  Relative  Proportion  of  the  Heating  Surfaces  in  the  Elements 
of  the  Multiple  Evaporator  and  their  Actual  Dimensions — The  Pressure  Exerted  by  Currents 
of  Steam  and  Gas  upon  Floating  Drops  of  Water — The  Motion  of  Floating  Drops  of  Water 
upon  which  Press  Currents  of  Steam — The  Splashing  of  Evaporating  Liquids — The  Diameter 
of  Pipes  for  Steam,  Alcohol,  Vapour  and  Air — The  Diameter  of  Water  Pipes — The  Loss 
of  Heat  from  Apparatus  and  Pipes  to  the  Surrounding'  Air,  and  Means  for  Preventing, 
the  Loss — Condensers — Heating  Liquids  by  Means  of  Steam — The  Cooling  of  Liquids— 
The  Volumes  to  be  Exhausted  from  Condensers  by  the  Air-pumps — A  Few  Remarks  on  Air- 
pumps  and  the  Vacua  they  Produce — The  Volumetric  Efficiency  of  Air-pumps — The  Volumes 
of  Air  which  must  be  Exhausted  from  a  Vessel  in  order  to  Reduce  its  Original  Pressure  to  a 
Certain  Lower  Pressure — Index. 

Plumbing,  Decorating,  Metal 
Work,  etc.,  etc. 

EXTERNAL    PLUMBING    WORK.      A  Treatise   on    Lead 
Work  for  Roofs.     By  JOHN  W.  HART,  R.P.C.     180  Illustrations.     272 
pp.     Demy  8vo.     Second  Edition  Revised.     1902.     Price  7s.  6d. ;  India 
and  Colonies,  8s. ;  Other  Countries,  8s.  6d. ;  strictly  net. 
Contents. 

Cast  Sheet  Lead— Milled  Sheet  Lead— Roof  Cesspools— Socket  Pipes— Drips— Gutters- 
Gutters  (continued) — Breaks — Circular  Breaks — Flats — Flats  (continued) — Rolls  on  Flats — 
Roll  Ends — Roll  Intersections — Seam  Rolls — Seam  Rolls  (continued) — Tack  Fixings— Step 
Flashings — Step  Flashings  (continued) — Secret  Gutters — Soakers — Hip  and  Valley  Soakers- 
— Dormer  Windows — Dormer  Windows  (continued) — Dormer  Tops — Internal  Dormers — 
Skylights — Hips  and  Ridging — Hips  and  Ridging  (continued) — Fixings  for  Hips  and  Ridging 
— Ornamental  Ridging — Ornamental  Curb  Rolls — Curb  Rolls — Cornices — Towers  and  Finials 
— Towers  and  Finials  (continued) — Towers  and  Finials  (continued) — Domes — Domes  (continued) 
— Ornamental  Lead  Work — Rain  Water  Heads — Rain  Water  Heads  (continued) — Rain  Water 
Heads  (continued). 

HINTS  TO  PLUMBERS  ON  JOINT  WIPING,  PIPE 
BENDING  AND  LEAD  BURNING.  Third  Edition, 
Revised  and  Corrected.  By  JOHN  W.  HART,  R.P.C.  184  Illustrations. 
313  pp.  Demy  8vo.  1901.  Price  7s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  8s.; 
Other  Countries,  8s.  6d. ;  strictly  net. 
Contents. 

Pipe  Bending  —  Pipe  Bending  (continued)  —  Pipe  Bending  (continued)  —  Square  Pipe 
Bendings — Half-circular  Elbows — Curved  Bends  on  Square  Pipe — Bossed  Bends — Curved 
Plinth  Bends — Rain-water  Shoes  on  Square  Pipe — Curved  and  Angle  Bends — Square  Pipe 
Fixings — Joint-wiping — Substitutes  for  Wiped  Joints — Preparing  Wiped  Joints— Joint  Fixings 
— Plumbing  Irons — Joint  Fixings — Use  of  "Touch"  in  Soldering — Underhand  Joints — Blown 
and  Copper  Bit  Joints — Branch  Joints— Branch  Joints  (continued) — Block  Joints — Block 
Joints  (continued)— Block  Fixings— Astragal  Joints— Pipe  Fixings— Large  Branch  Joints- 
Large  Underhand  Joints — Solders — Autogenous  Soldering  or  Lead  Burning — Index. 

WORKSHOP  WRINKLES  for  Decorators,  Painters,  Paper- 
hangers  and  Others.  By  W.  N.  BROWN.  Crown  8vo.  128  pp.  1901. 
Price  2s.  6d. ;  Abroad,  3s. ;  strictly  net. 


28 

SANITARY   PLUMBING    AND    DRAINAGE.      By    JOHN. 
W.  HART.     Demy  8vo.     With  208  Illustrations.     250  pp.     1904.     Price' 
7s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  8s. ;  Other  Countries,  8s.  6d. ;  strictly  net. 
Contents. 

Sanitary  Surveys— Drain  Testing— Drain  Testing  with  Smoke— Testing  Drains  with  Water 
— Drain  Plugs  for  Testing — Sanitary  Defects — Closets — Baths  and  Lavatories — House  Drains 
— Manholes — Iron  Soil  Pipes — Lead  Soil  Pipes — Ventilating  Pipes — Water-closets — Flushing 
Cisterns — Baths — Bath  Fittings  —  Lavatories  —  Lavatory  Fittings — Sinks — Waste  Pipes — 
Water  Supply — Ball  Valves  —  Town  House  Sanitary  Arrangements — Drainage — Jointing 
Pipes — Accessible  Drains — Iron  Drains — Iron  Junctions — Index. 

THE  PRINCIPLES  AND  PRACTICE  OP  DIPPING, 
BURNISHING,  LACQUERING  AND  BRONZING 
BRASS  WARE.  By  W.  NORMAN  BROWN.  35  pp.  Crown 
8vo.  1900.  Price  2s. ;  Abroad,  2s.  6d. ;  strictly  net. 

HOUSE     DECORATING     AND     PAINTING.        By    W. 

NORMAN  BROWN.     Eighty-eight  Illustrations.      150  pp.      Crown  8vo. 

1900.  Price  3s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  4s. ;  Other  Countries,  4s.  6d. ; 
strictly  net. 

A  HISTORY  OF  DECORATIVE  ART.  By  W.  NORMAN 
BROWN.  Thirty-nine  Illustrations.  96  pp.  Crown  8vo.  1900.  Price 
2s.  6d. ;  Abroad,  3s. ;  strictly  net. 

A  HANDBOOK  ON  JAPANNING  AND  ENAMELLING 
FOR  CYCLES,  BEDSTEADS,  TINWARE,  ETC.  By 

WILLIAM  NORMAN   BROWN.      52   pp.   and    Illustrations.     Crown   8vo. 

1901.  Price  2s. ;  Abroad,  2s.  6d. ;  net. 

THE    PRINCIPLES    OF    HOT    WATER    SUPPLY.       By 

JOHN  W.  HART,  R.P.C.  With  129  Illustrations.  1900.  177  pp.,  demy 
8vo.  Price  7s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  8s. ;  Other  Countries,  8s.  6d. ; 
strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Water  Circulation— The  Tank  System— Pipes  and  Joints— The  Cylinder  System— Boilers 
for  the  Cylinder  System— The  Cylinder  System— The  Combined  Tank  and  Cylinder  System 
— Combined  Independent  and  Kitchen  Boiler — Combined  Cylinder  and  Tank  System  with 
Duplicate  Boilers — Indirect  Heating  and  Boiler  Explosions — Pipe  Boilers — Safety  Valves — 
Safety  Valvep—The  American  System — Heating  Water  by  Steam — Steam  Kettles  and  Jets 
— Heating  Power  of  Steam — Covering  for  Hot  Water  Pipes — Index. 


Brewing  and  Botanical. 

HOPS  IN  THEIR  BOTANICAL,  AGRICULTURAL 
AND  TECHNICAL  ASPECT,  AND  AS  AN  ARTICLE 
OF  COMMERCE.  By  EMMANUEL  GROSS,  Professor  at 
the  Higher  Agricultural  College,  Tetschen-Liebwerd.  Translated 
from  the  German.  Seventy-eight  Illustrations.  1900.  340  pp.  Demy 
8vo.  Price  12s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  13s,  6d. ;  Other  Countries, 
15s. ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

HISTORY  OF  THE  HOP— THE  HOP  PLANT— Introductory— The  Roots-The  Stem— 
and  Leaves — Inflorescence  and  Flower :  Inflorescence  and  Flower  of  the  Male  Hop ;  In- 
florescence and  Flower  of  the  Female  Hop — The  Fruit  and  its  Glandular  Structure  :  The 
Fruit  and  Seed— Propagation  and  Selection  of  the  Hop— Varieties  of  the  Hop:  (a)  Red  Hops  ; 
(b)  Green  Hops ;  (c)  Pale  Green  Hops — Classification  according  to  the  Period  of  Ripening : 
Early  August  Hops;  Medium  Early  Hops;  Late  Hops— Injuries  to  Growth— Leaves  Turning 
Yellow,  Summer  or  Sunbrand,  Cones  Dropping  Off,  Honey  Dew,  Damage  from  Wind,  Hail 


29 

;and  Rain  ;  Vegetable  Enemies  of  the  Hop:  Animal  Enemies  of  the  Hop — Beneficial  Insects  on 
Hops— CULTIVATION— The  Requirements  of  the  Hop  in  Respect  of  Climate,  Soil  and 
Situation :  Climate :  Soil ;  Situation — Selection  of  Variety  and  Cuttings — Planting  a  Hop 
Garden:  Drainage;  Preparing  the  Ground;  Marking-out  for  Planting ;  Planting;  Cultivation 
and  Cropping  of  the  Hop  Garden  in  the  First  Year — Work  to  be  Performed  Annually  in  the 
Hop  Garden :  Working  the  Ground ;  Cutting ;  The  Non-cutting  System ;  The  Proper  Per- 
formance of  the  Operation  of  Cutting:  Method  of  Cutting:  Close  Cutting,  Ordinary  Cutting, 
The  Long  Cut,  The  Topping  Cut;  Proper  Season  for  Cutting:  Autumn  Cutting,  Spring 
•Cutting;  Manuring;  Training  the  Hop  Plant:  Poled  Gardens,  Frame  Training;  Principal 
Types  of  Frames ;  Pruning,  Cropping,  Topping,  and  Leaf  Stripping  the  Hop  Plant ;  Picking, 
Drying  and  Bagging — Principal  and  Subsidiary  Utilisation  of  Hops  and  Hop  Gardens — Life 
of  a  Hop  Garden ;  Subsequent  Cropping — Cost  of  Production,  Yield  and  Selling  Prices. 

Preservation  and  Storage — Physical  and  Chemical  Structure  of  the  Hop  Cone — Judging 
•Ahe  Value  of  Hops. 

Statistics  of  Production— The  Hop  Trade— Index. 


Timber  and  Wood  Waste. 

TIMBER  :  A  Comprehensive  Study  of  Wood  in  all  its  Aspects 
(Commercial  and  Botanical),  showing  the  Different  Applications  and 
Uses  of  Timber  in  Various  Trades,  etc.  Translated  from  the  French 
of  PAUL  CHARPENTIER.  Royal  8vo.  437  pp.  178  Illustrations.  1902. 
Price  12s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  13s.  6d. ;  Other  Countries,  15s.; 
net. 

Contents. 

Physical  and  Chemical  Properties  of  Timber— Composition  of  the  Vegetable  Bodies 
— Chief  Elements — M.  Fremy's  Researches — Elementary  Organs  of  Plants  and  especially  of 
Forests — Different  Parts  of  Wood  Anatomically  and  Chemically  Considered — General  Pro- 
perties of  Wood— Description  of  the  Different  Kinds  of  Wood— Principal  Essences  with 
Caducous  Leaves— Coniferous  Resinous  Trees— Division  of  the  Useful  Varieties  of  Timber 
in  the  Different  Countries  of  the  Globe— European  Timber— African  Timber— Asiatic 
Timber — American  Timber — Timber  of  Oceania — Forests — General  Notes  as  to  Forests  ;  their 
Influence — Opinions  as  to  Sylviculture — Improvement  of  Forests — Unwooding  and  Rewooding 
— Preservation  of  Forests — Exploitation  of  Forests — Damage  caused  to  Forests — Different 
Alterations— The  Preservation  of  Timber— Generalities— Causes  and  Progress  of  De- 
terioration— History  of  Different  Proposed  Processes — Dessication — Superficial  Carbonisation 
•of  Timber — Processes  by  Immersion — Generalities  as  to  Antiseptics  Employed — Injection 
Processes  in  Closed  Vessels—The  Boucherie  System,  Based  upon  the  Displacement  of  the 
Sap— Processes  for  Making  Timber  Uninflammable— Applications  of  Timber— Generalities 
—Working  Timber— Paving— Timber  for  Mines— Railway  Traverses— Accessory  Products— 
•Gums — Works  of  M.  Fremy — Resins — Barks — Tan — Application  of  Cork — The  Application  of 
Wood  to  Art  and  Dyeing— Different  Applications  of  Wood— Hard  Wood— Distillation  of 
Wood— Pyroligneous  Acid— Oil  of  Wood— Distillation  of  Resins— Index. 

THE  UTILISATION  OF  WOOD  WASTE.  Translated  from 
the  German  of  ERNST  HUBBARD.  Crown  8vo.  192  pp.  1902.  Fifty 
Illustrations.  Price  5s. ;  India  and  Colonies,  5s.  6d. ;  Other  Countries, 
6s.;  net. 

Contents. 

General  Remarks  on  the  Utilisation  of  Sawdust— Employment  of  Sawdust  as  Fuel, 
-with  and  without  Simultaneous  Recovery  of  Charcoal  and  the  Products  of  Distillation — 
Manufacture  of  Oxalic  Acid  from  Sawdust— Process  with  Soda  Lye;  Thorn's  Process; 
Bohlig's  Process — Manufacture  of  Spirit  (Ethyl  Alcohol)  from  Wood  Waste — Patent  Dyes 
(Organic  Sulphides,  Sulphur  Dyes,  or  Mercapto  Dyes)— Artificial  Wood  and  Plastic  Com- 
positions from  Sawdust — Production  of  Artificial  Wood  Compositions  for  Moulded  De- 
corations— Employment  of  Sawdust  for  Blasting  Powders  and  Gunpowders — Employment 
of  Sawdust  for  Briquettes— Employment  of  Sawdust  in  the  Ceramic  Industry  and  as  an 
Addition  to  Mortar — Manufacture  of  Paper  Pulp  from  Wood — Casks — Various  Applications 
of  Sawdust  and  Wood  Refuse — Calcium  Carbide — Manure — Wood  Mosaic  Plaques — Bottle 
Stoppers— Parquetry— Fire-lighters— Carborundum— The  Production  of  Wood  Wool— Bark- 
Index. 


30 

Building  and  Architecture. 

THE  PREVENTION  OF  DAMPNESS  IN  BUILDINGS ; 

with  Remarks  on  the  Causes,  Nature  and  Effects  of  Saline,  Efflores- 
cences and  Dry-rot,  for  Architects,  Builders,  Overseers,  Plasterers, 
Painters  and  House  Owners.  By  ADOLF  WILHELM  KEIM.  Translated 
from  the  German  of  the  second  revised  Edition  by  M.  J.  SALTER,  F.I.C., 
F.C.S.  Eight  Coloured  Plates  and  Thirteen  Illustrations.  Crown  8vo. 
115  pp.  1902.  Price  5s. ;  India  and  Colonies,  5s.  6d.  ;  Other  Countries, 
6s.;  net. 

Contents. 

The  Various  Causes  of  Dampness  and  Decay  of  the  Masonry  of  Buildings,  and  the 
Structural  and  Hygienic  Evils  of  the  Same — Precautionary  Measures  during  Building  against 
Dampness  and  Efflorescence — Methods  of  Remedying  Dampness  and  Efflorescences  in  the 
Walls  of  Old  Buildings— The  Artificial  Drying  of  New  Houses,  as  well  as  Old  Damp  Dwellings, 
and  the  Theory  of  the  Hardening  of  Mortar — New,  Certain  and  Permanently  Efficient 
Methods  for  Drying  Old  Damp  Walls  and  Dwellings — The  Cause  and  Origin  of  Dry-rot :  its 
Injurious  Effect  on  Health,  its  Destructive  Action  on  Buildings,  and  its  Successful  Repres- 
sion— Methods  of  Preventing  Dry-rot  to  be  Adopted  During  Construction — Old  Methods 
of  Preventing  Dry-rot — Recent  and  More  Efficient  Remedies  for  Dry-rot — Index. 

HANDBOOK  OF  TECHNICAL  TERMS  USED  IN  ARCHI- 
TECTURE AND  BUILDING,  AND  THEIR  ALLIED 
TRADES  AND  SUBJECTS.  By  AUGUSTINE  C.  PASSMORE. 
Demy  8vo.  380  pp.  1904.  Price  7s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  8s.  ; 
Other  Countries,  8s.  6d. ;  strictly  net. 


Foods  and  Sweetmeats. 

THE  MANUFACTURE  OF  PRESERVED  FOODS  AND 
SWEETMEATS.  By  A.  HAUSNER.  With  Twenty-eight 
Illustrations.  Translated  from  the  German  of  the  third  enlarged 
Edition.  Crown  8vo.  225  pp.  1902.  Price  7s.  6d. ;  India  and 
Colonies,  8s. ;  Other  Countries,  8s.  6d. ;  net. 

Contents. 

The  Manufacture  of  Conserves — Introduction — The  Causes  of,the  Putrefaction  of  Food 
— The  Chemical  Composition  of  Foods — The  Products  of  Decomposition — The  Causes  of  Fer- 
mentation and  Putrefaction — Preservative  Bodies — The  Various  Methods  of  Preserving  Food 
— The  Preservation  of  Animal  Food — Preserving  Meat  by  Means  of  Ice — The  Preservation 
of  Meat  by  Charcoal — Preservation  of  Meat  by  Drying — The  Preservation  of  Meat  by  the 
Exclusion  of  Air — The  Appert  Method — Preserving  Flesh  by  Smoking — Quick  Smoking — Pre- 
serving Meat  with  Salt — Quick  Salting  by  Air  Pressure — Quick  Salting  by  Liquid  Pressure — 
Gamgee's  Method  of  Preserving  Meat — The  Preservation  of  Eggs — Preservation  of  White 
and  Yolk  of  Egg — Milk  Preservation — Condensed  Milk — The  Preservation  of  Fat — Manu- 
facture of  Soup  Tablets— Meat  Biscuits— Extract  of  Beef— The  Preservation  of  Vegetable 
Foods  in  General — Compressing  Vegetables — Preservation  of  Vegetables  by  Appert's  Method 
•—The  Preservation  of  Fruit — Preservation  of  Fruit  by  Storage — The  Preservation  of  Fruit 
by  Drying— Drying  Fruit  by  Artificial  Heat— Roasting  Fruit— The  Preservation  of  Fruit  with 
Sugar — Boiled  Preserved  Fruit — The  Preservation  of  Fruit  in  Spirit,  Acetic  Acid  or  Glycerine 
>— Preservation  of  Fruit  without  Boiling — Jam  Manufacture — The  Manufacture  of  Fruit 
Jellies — The  Making  of  Gelatine  Jellies — The  Manufacture  of  "  Sulzen  " — The  Preservation  of 
Fermented  Beverages— The  Manufacture  of  Candies— Introduction— The  Manufacture  of 
Candied  Fruit — The  Manufacture  of  Boiled  Sugar  and  Caramel — The  Candying  of  Fruit — 
Caramelised  Fruit — The  Manufacture  of  Sugar  Sticks,  or  Barley  Sugar — Bonbon  Making — 
Fruit-  Drops — The  Manufacture  of  Dragees — The  Machinery  and  Appliances  used  in  Candy 
Manufacture — Dyeing  Candies  and  Bonbons — Essential  Oils  used  in  Candy  Making — Fruit 
Essences — The  Manufacture  of  Filled  Bonbons,  Liqueur  Bonbons  and  Stamped  Lozenges — 
Recipes  for  Jams  and  Jellies — Recipes  for  Bonbon  Making — Drageea — Appendix — Index. 


31 

Dyeing  Fancy  Goods. 

THE  ART  OF  DYEING  AND  STAINING  MARBLE, 
ARTIFICIAL  STONE,  BONE,  HORN,  IVORY  AND 
WOOD,  AND  OF  IMITATING  ALL  SORTS  OF 
WOOD.  A  Practical  Handbook  for  the  Use  of  Joiners, 
Turners,  Manufacturers  of  Fancy  Goods,  Stick  and  Umbrella  Makers, 
Comb  Makers,  etc.  Translated  from  the  German  of  D.  H.  SOXHLET, 
Technical  Chemist.  Crown  8vo.  168  pp.  1902.  Price  5s. ;  India  and 
Colonies,  5s.  6d. ;  Other  Countries,  6s. ;  net. 
Contents. 

Mordants  and  Stains  —  Natural  Dyes — Artificial  Pigments — Coal  Tar  Dyes  —  Staining 
Marble  and  Artificial  Stone — Dyeing,  Bleaching  and  Imitation  of  Bone,  Horn  and  Ivory — 
Imitation  of  Tortoiseshell  for  Combs :  Yellows,  Dyeing  Nuts — Jvory — Wood  Dyeing — Imitation 
•of  Mahogany :  Dark  Walnut,  Oak,  Birch-Bark,  Elder-Marquetry,  Walnut,  Walnut-Marquetry, 
Mahogany,  Spanish  Mahogany,  Palisander  and  Rose  Wood,  Tortoiseshell,  Oak,  Ebony,  Pear 
Tree — Black  Dyeing  Processes  with  Penetrating  Colours — Varnishes  and  Polishes:  English 
Furniture  Polish,  Vienna  Furniture  Polish,  Amber  Varnish,  Copal  Varnish,  Composition  for 
Preserving  Furniture — Index. 

Lithography,    Printing    and 
Engraving. 

PRACTICAL     LITHOGRAPHY.       By     ALFRED     SEYMOUR. 
Demy  8vo.      With  Frontispiece  and  33  Illus.      120  pp.      1903.     Price 
5s. ;  Colonies,  5s.  6d.  ;  Other  Countries,  6s. ;  net. 
Contents. 

Stones — Transfer  Inks — Transfer  Papers — Transfer  Printing — Litho  Press — Press  Work — 
Machine  Printing — Colour  Printing — Substitutes  for  Lithographic  Stones — Tin  Plate  Printing 
and  Decoration — Photo-Lithography. 

PRINTERS'   AND  STATIONERS'   READY  RECKONER 
AND    COMPENDIUM.      Compiled    by    VICTOR    GRAHAM. 
Crown  8vo.      112  pp.      1904.     Price  3s.  6d. ;  India  and  Colonies,  4s.; 
Other  Countries,  4s.  6d. ;  strictly  net,  post  free. 
Contents. 

Price  of  Paper  per  Sheet,  Quire,  Ream  and  Lb.— Cost  of  100  to  1000  Sheets  at  various 
Sizes  and  Prices  per  Ream — Cost  of  Cards — Quantity  Table — Sizes  and  Weights  of  Paper, 
Cards,  etc. — Notes  on  Account  Books — Discount  Tables — Sizes  of  spaces  —  Leads  to  a  Ib. — 
Dictionary — Measure  for  Bookwork — Correcting  Proofs,  etc. 

ENGRAVING  FOR  ILLUSTRATION.  HISTORICAL 
AND  PRACTICAL  NOTES.  By  J.  KIRKBRIDE.  72  pp. 
Two  Plates  and  6  Illustrations.  Crown  8vo.  1903.  Price  2s.  6d. ; 
Abroad,  3s.  ;  strictly  net. 

Contents. 

Its  Inception — Wood  Engraving — Metal  Engraving — Engraving  in  England — Etching — 
Mezzotint  —  Photo-Process  Engraving  —  The  Engraver's  Task — Appreciative  Criticism  — 
fndex. 

Bookbinding. 

PRACTICAL  BOOKBINDING.     By  PAUL  ADAM.    Translated 
from  the  German.    Crown  8vo.    180pp.     127  Illustrations.    1903.    Price 
5s.  ;  Colonies,  5s.  6d.  ;  Other  Countries,  6s. ;  net. 
Contents. 


Decc 

Cutting,    Rounding 

Boarding— Preparing  the  Cover— Work  with  the  Blocking  Press— Treatment  of  Sewn  Books, 

Fastening  in  Covers,  and  Finishing  Off — Handtooling  and  Other  Decoration — Account  Books 

— School  Books,  Mounting  Maps,  Drawings,  etc.— Index. 


32 

Sugar  Refining. 

THE  TECHNOLOGY  OF  SUGAR:  Practical  Treatise  on 
the  Modern  Methods  of  Manufacture  of  Sugar  from  the  Sugar  Cane  and 
Sugar  Beet.  By  JOHN  GEDDES  MC!NTOSH.  Demy  8vo.  83  Illus- 
trations. 420pp.  Seventy-six  Tables.  1903.  Price  10s.  6d. ;  Colonies, 
11s. ;  Other  Countries,  12s.  ;  net. 

(See  "  Evaporating,  Condensing,  etc.,  Apparatus,"  p.  27.) 
Contents. 

Chemistry  of  Sucrose,  Lactose,  Maltose,  Glucose,  Invert  Sugar,  etc. — Purchase  and 
Analysis  of  Beets — Treatment  of  Beets — Diffusion — Filtration — Concentration — Evaporation — 
Sugar  Cane  :  Cultivation — Milling — Diffusion — Sugar  Refining — Analysis  of  Raw  Sugars — 
Chemistry  of  Molasses,  etc. 

Bibliography. 

CLASSIFIED  GUIDE  TO  TECHNICAL  AND  COM- 
MERCIAL BOOKS.  Compiled  by  EDGAR  GREENWOOD. 
Demy  8vo.  224  pp.  1904.  Being  a  Subject-list  of  the  Principal 
British  and  American  Books  in  print ;  giving  Title,  Author,  Size,  Date, 
Publisher  and  Price.  Price  7s.  6d.  ;  India  and  Colonies,  8s.  ;  Other 
Countries,  8s.  6d. ;  strictly  net,  post  free. 
Contents. 

1.  Agriculture  and  Farming— Agricultural  Chemistry— Bee-keeping— Cattle,  Pigs,  Sheep- 
— Dairy  and  Dairy  Work — Feeding  Animals — Forestry — Fruit  Growing — Irrigation — Manures 
—Poultry  Farming.  2.  Air,  Aerial  Navigation.  3.  Architecture  and  Building.  4.  Art 
— Lettering — Modelling — Ornament — Painting — Perspective.  5.  Arts  and  Crafts,  Amateur 
Work.  6.  Auction  Sales.  7.  Banking.  8.  Book  and  Newspaper  Production,  Paper- 
making,  Printing  —  Bookbinding  —  Bookselling  —  Copyright  —  Journalism  —  Lithography  — 
Paper-making— Printing,  Typography— Process  Work— Stationery.  9.  Brewing  and  Dis- 
tilling. 10.  Cabinet-making.  11.  Calculators,  Ready  Reckoners,  Discount  Tables. 
12.  Carpentry  and  Joinery.  13.  Chemicals,  Chemistry.  14.  Coachbuilding.  15. 
Commerce,  Business.  16.  Dams,  Docks,  Harbours.  17.  Dogs.  18.  Domestic  Eco- 
nomy— Cookery — Dressmaking — Laundry— Millinery.  19.  Electricity — Alternating  Currents 
—Dynamos— Electric  Heating— Electric  Lighting— Electric  Traction— Telegraphy— Tele- 
phones— Wireless  Telegraphy.  20.  Elocution,  Voice  Production.  21.  Engineering  and 
Metal  Work— Architectural  Engineering—  Blacksmithing— Boilers— Bridges— Civil  Engineer- 
ing—Fuel, Smoke— Galvanising,  Tinning — Gas,  Oil  and  Air  Engines — Hardware — Hydraulic 
Engineering— Indicators— Injectors — Iron  and  Steel — Ironfounding— Lathes,  Tools— Loco- 
motives— Machine  Construction  and  Design  -Marine  Engineering— Mechanical  Engineering — 
Metal  Work-^Pattern  Making — Pipes — Power  Transmission— Pumps  — Refrigeration — Saw 
Filing— Screw  Cutting— Steam  Engine— Strains  and  Stresses— Turbines.  22.  Factories  and 
Workshops.  23.  Financial — Investments — Stockbroking.  24.  Foods  and  Beverages — 
Adulteration  and  Analysis — Bread — Cakes — Fish — Flour,  Grain— Food  and  Drug  Acts— Tea. 
25.  Foreign  Exchange  Tables,  Metric  System.  26.  Foreign  Languages.  27.  Gardening, 
Flowers.  28.  Gas— Acetylene— Gas  Fitting— Gas  Lighting  and  Supply.  29.  Glass.  30. 
Glues,  Inks,  Pastes.  31.  Horses.  32.  Hospitals,  Nursing.  33.  House  Decoration. 
34.  Hygiene,  Public  Health— Bacteriology— Hygiene— Public  Health— Sanitary  Inspection 
—Sewage  and  Sewerage.  35.  India-Rubber.  36.  Insurance.  37.  Jewellery,  Silver  and 
Goldsmith's  Work.  38.  Land,  Property.  39.  Leather  Trades.  40.  Legal— Arbitration 
— Bankruptcy  Law— Commercial  Law — Contract  Law — Solicitors — Stamp  Duties — Trustee 
Law— Wills.  41.  Metallurgy.  42.  Military.  43.  Mining,  Quarrying.  44.  Motor  Cars 
and  Cycles.  45.  Music.  16.  Nautical,  Navigation.  46a.  Navy.  47.  Oils,  Fats.  48. 
Optical,  Microscopy,  Instruments.  49.  Paints,  Colours,  Varnishes.  50.  Patents, 
Trade  Marks.  51.  Photography.  52.  Physics.  53.  Physical  Training.  54.  Plumbing, 
Heating,  Ventilation.  55.  Pottery,  China,  Bricks.  56.  Public  Meetings,  Elections, 
Taxes.  57.  Railways  and  Tramways— Construction  of  Railways— Carriage  and  Wagon 
Building— Law  of  Railways— Light  Railways— Management.  58.  Rivers,  Canals.  £9.  Roads, 
Highways.  60.  Shopkeeping,  Ticket  Writing.  61.  Shorthand,  Typewriting.  62. 
Soaps,  Candles.  63.  Building,  Co-operative  and  Friendly  Societies.  64.  Surveying. 
65.  Teaching,  Education.  66.  Telegraph  Codes.  67.  Textile  Trades.  68.  Timber. 
69.  Veterinary.  70.  Watches,  Clocks.  71.  Water.  Subject  Index. 

SCOTT,  GREENWOOD  &  Co.  will  forward  these  Books,  post  free,  upon 
receipt  of  remittance  at  the  published  price,  or  they  can  be  obtained  through 
all  Booksellers. 

Full  List  of  Contents  of  any  of  the  books  will  be  sent  on  application. 

SCOTT,    GREENWOOD    &    CO., 

ZTecbnical  Boofe  publisbers, 

19    LUDGATE    HILL,    LONDON,    E.G. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 
BERKELEY 

Return  to  desk  from  which  borrowed. 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


FEB 


APR1  6  195f 


REC'D  L.D 


I81£ 
APRS    1977 


57 
2 


V 


21-100m-7,'52(A2528sl6)476